Mercurial > emacs
annotate man/texinfo.tex @ 83522:a5d712e6585a
Fix crashes in `delete-terminal' caused by recursive calls or X displays with live frames.
* src/termhooks.h (terminal) <deleted>: New member.
* src/term.c (delete_tty): Use it.
(deleting_tty): Remove old variable.
* src/terminal.c (delete_terminal): Use terminal->deleted.
* src/xterm.c (x_delete_terminal): Use terminal->deleted. Delete all
frames on the display explicitly.
git-archimport-id: lorentey@elte.hu--2004/emacs--multi-tty--0--patch-562
author | Karoly Lorentey <lorentey@elte.hu> |
---|---|
date | Sat, 20 May 2006 12:20:41 +0000 |
parents | edd2bdf83f35 |
children | 6155393edd3b 146cd8369025 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
37713 | 1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. |
2 % | |
3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. | |
4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi | |
5 % | |
70570 | 6 \def\texinfoversion{2006-05-07.15} |
69769 | 7 % |
8 % Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, | |
9 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free | |
10 % Software Foundation, Inc. | |
37713 | 11 % |
12 % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or | |
13 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as | |
14 % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at | |
15 % your option) any later version. | |
16 % | |
17 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be | |
18 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty | |
19 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU | |
20 % General Public License for more details. | |
21 % | |
22 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
23 % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write | |
64083 | 24 % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, |
25 % Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. | |
37713 | 26 % |
69769 | 27 % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing |
28 % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without | |
29 % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) | |
37713 | 30 % |
31 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug | |
32 % reports; you can get the latest version from: | |
69769 | 33 % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or |
47284 | 34 % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex |
69769 | 35 % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). |
36 % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out | |
37713 | 37 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
38 % |
37713 | 39 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a |
40 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the | |
41 % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. | |
42 % | |
43 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the | |
44 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple | |
45 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: | |
46 % tex foo.texi | |
47 % texindex foo.?? | |
48 % tex foo.texi | |
49 % tex foo.texi | |
47284 | 50 % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. |
51 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. | |
37713 | 52 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more |
53 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. | |
54 % | |
69769 | 55 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some |
56 % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the | |
57 % full Texinfo distribution. | |
58 % | |
59 % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. | |
60 | |
37713 | 61 |
62 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} | |
63 | |
64 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number | |
65 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because | |
66 % they might have appeared in the input file name. | |
67 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% | |
68 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} | |
69 | |
69769 | 70 \message{Basics,} |
71 \chardef\other=12 | |
72 | |
73 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. | |
74 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. | |
75 \let\+ = \relax | |
76 | |
77 % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. | |
37713 | 78 \let\ptexb=\b |
79 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet | |
80 \let\ptexc=\c | |
81 \let\ptexcomma=\, | |
82 \let\ptexdot=\. | |
83 \let\ptexdots=\dots | |
84 \let\ptexend=\end | |
85 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv | |
86 \let\ptexexclam=\! | |
69769 | 87 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote |
88 \let\ptexgtr=> | |
89 \let\ptexhat=^ | |
37713 | 90 \let\ptexi=\i |
69769 | 91 \let\ptexindent=\indent |
92 \let\ptexinsert=\insert | |
37713 | 93 \let\ptexlbrace=\{ |
69769 | 94 \let\ptexless=< |
95 \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite | |
96 \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent | |
97 \let\ptexplus=+ | |
37713 | 98 \let\ptexrbrace=\} |
69769 | 99 \let\ptexslash=\/ |
37713 | 100 \let\ptexstar=\* |
101 \let\ptext=\t | |
102 | |
103 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it | |
104 % starts a new line in the output. | |
105 \newlinechar = `^^J | |
106 | |
69769 | 107 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error |
108 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. | |
109 % | |
110 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined | |
111 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. | |
112 \else | |
113 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} | |
114 \fi | |
115 | |
37713 | 116 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. |
117 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi | |
118 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi | |
119 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi | |
120 \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi | |
121 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi | |
122 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi | |
123 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi | |
124 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi | |
125 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi | |
126 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi | |
127 \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi | |
128 \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi | |
129 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi | |
130 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi | |
131 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi | |
132 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi | |
133 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi | |
134 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi | |
135 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi | |
136 % | |
137 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi | |
138 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi | |
139 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi | |
140 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi | |
141 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi | |
142 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi | |
143 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi | |
144 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi | |
145 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi | |
146 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi | |
147 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi | |
148 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi | |
149 % | |
150 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi | |
151 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi | |
152 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi | |
153 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi | |
154 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi | |
69769 | 155 |
156 % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. | |
157 \chardef\spacecat = 10 | |
158 \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} | |
37713 | 159 |
160 % Ignore a token. | |
161 % | |
162 \def\gobble#1{} | |
163 | |
69769 | 164 % The following is used inside several \edef's. |
165 \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} | |
166 | |
167 % Hyphenation fixes. | |
168 \hyphenation{ | |
169 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script | |
170 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps | |
171 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script | |
172 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm | |
173 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces | |
174 spell-ing spell-ings | |
175 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space | |
176 wide-spread wrap-around | |
177 } | |
37713 | 178 |
179 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. | |
69769 | 180 \newdimen\bindingoffset |
181 \newdimen\normaloffset | |
37713 | 182 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight |
183 | |
69769 | 184 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles |
185 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided | |
186 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). | |
187 % | |
188 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} | |
189 | |
190 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should | |
191 % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the | |
192 % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would | |
193 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main | |
194 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). | |
195 % | |
196 \def\|{% | |
197 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. | |
198 \leavevmode | |
199 % | |
200 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. | |
201 \vadjust{% | |
202 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current | |
203 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. | |
204 \vskip-\baselineskip | |
205 % | |
206 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So | |
207 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. | |
208 \llap{% | |
209 % | |
210 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. | |
211 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt | |
212 % | |
213 % This is the space between the bar and the text. | |
214 \hskip 12pt | |
215 }% | |
216 }% | |
217 } | |
218 | |
37713 | 219 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file |
220 % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, | |
69769 | 221 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make |
222 % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log | |
223 % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. | |
37713 | 224 % |
225 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% | |
69769 | 226 \def\loggingall{% |
227 \tracingstats2 | |
228 \tracingpages1 | |
229 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex | |
230 \tracingparagraphs1 | |
231 \tracingoutput1 | |
232 \tracingmacros2 | |
233 \tracingrestores1 | |
234 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen | |
235 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging | |
236 \tracingscantokens1 | |
237 \tracingifs1 | |
238 \tracinggroups1 | |
239 \tracingnesting2 | |
240 \tracingassigns1 | |
241 \fi | |
242 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex | |
243 \errorcontextlines16 | |
37713 | 244 }% |
245 | |
47284 | 246 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing |
247 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
248 % |
47284 | 249 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount |
250 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} | |
251 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount | |
252 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} | |
253 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount | |
254 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} | |
255 | |
37713 | 256 % For @cropmarks command. |
257 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. | |
258 % | |
259 \newif\ifcropmarks | |
260 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue | |
261 % | |
262 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. | |
263 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 | |
264 % | |
265 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines | |
266 \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc | |
267 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt | |
268 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in | |
269 | |
270 % Main output routine. | |
271 \chardef\PAGE = 255 | |
272 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} | |
273 | |
274 \newbox\headlinebox | |
275 \newbox\footlinebox | |
276 | |
277 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents | |
278 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. | |
279 \def\onepageout#1{% | |
280 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi | |
281 % | |
282 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset | |
283 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi | |
284 % | |
285 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in | |
286 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). | |
287 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% | |
288 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% | |
289 % | |
290 {% | |
291 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to | |
292 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends | |
293 % before the \shipout runs. | |
294 % | |
295 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. | |
296 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if | |
69769 | 297 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. |
298 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: | |
299 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} | |
300 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; | |
301 % it needs to be | |
302 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} | |
37713 | 303 \shipout\vbox{% |
304 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. | |
69769 | 305 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi |
37713 | 306 % |
307 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup | |
308 \hsize = \outerhsize | |
309 \vskip-\topandbottommargin | |
310 \vtop to0pt{% | |
311 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% | |
312 \nointerlineskip | |
313 \line{% | |
314 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% | |
315 \hfill | |
316 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% | |
317 }% | |
318 \vss}% | |
319 \vskip\topandbottommargin | |
320 \line\bgroup | |
321 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. | |
322 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi | |
323 \vbox\bgroup | |
324 \fi | |
325 % | |
326 \unvbox\headlinebox | |
327 \pagebody{#1}% | |
328 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt | |
329 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. | |
330 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.) | |
331 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. | |
332 \vskip 2\baselineskip | |
333 \unvbox\footlinebox | |
334 \fi | |
335 % | |
336 \ifcropmarks | |
337 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup | |
338 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup | |
339 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill | |
340 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick | |
341 \vbox to0pt{\vss | |
342 \line{% | |
343 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% | |
344 \hfill | |
345 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% | |
346 }% | |
347 \nointerlineskip | |
348 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% | |
349 }% | |
350 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause | |
351 \fi | |
352 }% end of \shipout\vbox | |
69769 | 353 }% end of group with \indexdummies |
37713 | 354 \advancepageno |
355 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi | |
356 } | |
357 | |
358 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen | |
359 | |
360 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} | |
361 {\catcode`\@ =11 | |
362 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi | |
363 % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) | |
364 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present | |
365 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi | |
366 \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1 | |
367 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi | |
368 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} | |
369 } | |
370 | |
371 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are | |
372 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize | |
373 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) | |
374 % | |
375 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} | |
376 \def\nstop{\vbox | |
377 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} | |
378 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} | |
379 \def\nsbot{\vbox | |
380 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} | |
381 | |
382 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of | |
383 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a | |
384 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. | |
385 % | |
69769 | 386 \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} |
387 \def\parseargusing#1#2{% | |
388 \def\argtorun{#2}% | |
37713 | 389 \begingroup |
390 \obeylines | |
69769 | 391 \spaceisspace |
392 #1% | |
393 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. | |
394 } | |
37713 | 395 |
396 {\obeylines % | |
397 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% | |
398 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. | |
69769 | 399 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% |
37713 | 400 }% |
401 } | |
402 | |
69769 | 403 % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. |
404 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} | |
405 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} | |
406 | |
407 % Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. | |
408 % | |
409 % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., | |
37713 | 410 % @end itemize @c foo |
69769 | 411 % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed |
412 % by \finishparsearg. | |
413 % | |
414 \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} | |
415 \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} | |
416 \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% | |
417 \def\temp{#3}% | |
418 \ifx\temp\empty | |
419 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: | |
420 \let\temp\finishparsearg | |
421 \else | |
422 \let\temp\argcheckspaces | |
423 \fi | |
424 % Put the space token in: | |
425 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm | |
426 } | |
427 | |
428 % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so | |
429 % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. | |
430 % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, | |
431 % just before passing the control to \argtorun. | |
432 % (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is | |
433 % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger | |
434 % that a pair of braces would be stripped. | |
435 % | |
436 % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. | |
437 % | |
438 \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} | |
439 | |
440 % \parseargdef\foo{...} | |
441 % is roughly equivalent to | |
442 % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} | |
443 % \def\Xfoo#1{...} | |
444 % | |
445 % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my | |
446 % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 | |
447 | |
448 \def\parseargdef#1{% | |
449 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% | |
450 } | |
451 \def\doparseargdef#1#2{% | |
452 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% | |
453 \def#1##1% | |
454 } | |
455 | |
456 % Several utility definitions with active space: | |
457 { | |
37713 | 458 \obeyspaces |
69769 | 459 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } |
460 | |
461 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword | |
462 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this | |
463 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input | |
464 % should produce a line of output anyway. | |
465 % | |
466 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} | |
467 | |
468 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces | |
469 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the | |
470 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). | |
471 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} | |
472 } | |
37713 | 473 |
474 | |
475 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} | |
476 | |
69769 | 477 % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: |
478 % | |
479 % \envdef\foo{...} | |
480 % \def\Efoo{...} | |
481 % | |
482 % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the | |
483 % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also | |
484 % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks | |
485 % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be | |
486 % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. | |
487 % | |
488 % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they | |
489 % are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group. (The | |
490 % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this | |
491 % special case.) | |
492 | |
493 | |
494 % At runtime, environments start with this: | |
495 \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} | |
496 % initialize | |
497 \let\thisenv\empty | |
498 | |
499 % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': | |
500 \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | |
501 \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | |
502 | |
503 % Check whether we're in the right environment: | |
504 \def\checkenv#1{% | |
505 \def\temp{#1}% | |
506 \ifx\thisenv\temp | |
507 \else | |
508 \badenverr | |
509 \fi | |
510 } | |
511 | |
512 % Evironment mismatch, #1 expected: | |
513 \def\badenverr{% | |
514 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
515 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, | |
516 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% | |
517 } | |
518 \def\inenvironment#1{% | |
519 \ifx#1\empty | |
520 out of any environment% | |
521 \else | |
522 in environment \expandafter\string#1% | |
523 \fi | |
524 } | |
37713 | 525 |
526 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. | |
69769 | 527 % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv |
528 % | |
529 \parseargdef\end{% | |
530 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname | |
37713 | 531 \else |
69769 | 532 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 |
533 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname | |
534 \csname E#1\endcsname | |
535 \endgroup | |
37713 | 536 \fi |
537 } | |
538 | |
69769 | 539 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} |
540 | |
37713 | 541 |
542 %% Simple single-character @ commands | |
543 | |
544 % @@ prints an @ | |
545 % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). | |
546 \def\@{{\tt\char64}} | |
547 | |
548 % This is turned off because it was never documented | |
549 % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. | |
550 %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' | |
551 %% but suppressing ligatures. | |
552 %\def\`{{`}} | |
553 %\def\'{{'}} | |
554 | |
555 % Used to generate quoted braces. | |
556 \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} | |
557 \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} | |
558 \let\{=\mylbrace | |
559 \let\}=\myrbrace | |
560 \begingroup | |
69769 | 561 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, |
562 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. | |
563 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other | |
37713 | 564 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 |
69769 | 565 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other |
566 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% | |
567 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% | |
568 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% | |
569 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% | |
570 !endgroup | |
571 | |
572 % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. | |
573 \let\comma = , | |
37713 | 574 |
575 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent | |
69769 | 576 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. |
37713 | 577 \let\, = \c |
578 \let\dotaccent = \. | |
579 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} | |
580 \let\tieaccent = \t | |
581 \let\ubaraccent = \b | |
582 \let\udotaccent = \d | |
583 | |
69769 | 584 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm |
585 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. | |
37713 | 586 \def\questiondown{?`} |
587 \def\exclamdown{!`} | |
69769 | 588 \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} |
589 \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} | |
37713 | 590 |
591 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. | |
592 \def\imacro{i} | |
593 \def\jmacro{j} | |
594 \def\dotless#1{% | |
595 \def\temp{#1}% | |
596 \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi | |
597 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j | |
598 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% | |
599 \fi\fi | |
600 } | |
601 | |
69769 | 602 % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a |
603 % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) | |
604 % | |
605 \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } | |
606 | |
607 % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in | |
608 % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most | |
609 % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using | |
610 % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and | |
611 % \scriptscriptstyle). | |
612 % | |
613 \def\LaTeX{% | |
614 L\kern-.36em | |
615 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% | |
616 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% | |
617 \kern-.15em | |
618 \TeX | |
619 } | |
620 | |
37713 | 621 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space |
622 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space | |
623 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and | |
624 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the | |
625 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. | |
626 {\catcode`@ = 11 | |
627 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble | |
628 % if the definition is written into an index file. | |
629 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M | |
630 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } | |
631 } | |
632 | |
633 % @: forces normal size whitespace following. | |
634 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } | |
635 | |
636 % @* forces a line break. | |
637 \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} | |
638 | |
69769 | 639 % @/ allows a line break. |
640 \let\/=\allowbreak | |
641 | |
37713 | 642 % @. is an end-of-sentence period. |
69769 | 643 \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
37713 | 644 |
645 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. | |
69769 | 646 \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
37713 | 647 |
648 % @? is an end-of-sentence query. | |
69769 | 649 \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
650 | |
651 % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. | |
652 % | |
653 \def\onword{on} | |
654 \def\offword{off} | |
655 % | |
656 \parseargdef\frenchspacing{% | |
657 \def\temp{#1}% | |
658 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing | |
659 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing | |
660 \else | |
661 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
662 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}% | |
663 \fi\fi | |
664 } | |
37713 | 665 |
666 % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the | |
667 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would | |
668 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. | |
669 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} | |
670 | |
671 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing | |
672 % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box | |
673 % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for | |
674 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is | |
675 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, | |
676 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and | |
677 % the text is small, which looks bad. | |
678 % | |
69769 | 679 % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can |
680 % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it | |
681 % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an | |
682 % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The | |
683 % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit | |
684 % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). | |
685 % | |
686 \newbox\groupbox | |
687 \def\vfilllimit{0.7} | |
688 % | |
689 \envdef\group{% | |
690 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else | |
37713 | 691 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp |
692 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% | |
693 \fi | |
69769 | 694 \startsavinginserts |
695 % | |
696 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup | |
37713 | 697 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as |
698 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an | |
699 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after | |
700 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group | |
701 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo | |
702 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. | |
703 \comment | |
704 } | |
705 % | |
69769 | 706 % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts |
707 % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) | |
708 % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space | |
709 % above. But it's pretty close. | |
710 \def\Egroup{% | |
711 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group | |
712 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. | |
713 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. | |
714 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth | |
715 \egroup % End the \vtop. | |
716 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. | |
717 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox | |
718 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). | |
719 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal | |
720 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big | |
721 % group, force a page break. | |
722 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 | |
723 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight | |
724 \page | |
725 \fi | |
726 \fi | |
727 \box\groupbox | |
728 \prevdepth = \dimen1 | |
729 \checkinserts | |
730 } | |
731 % | |
37713 | 732 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help |
733 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. | |
734 % | |
735 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% | |
736 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% | |
737 where each line of input produces a line of output.} | |
738 | |
739 % @need space-in-mils | |
740 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. | |
741 | |
742 \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in | |
743 | |
744 % Old definition--didn't work. | |
69769 | 745 %\parseargdef\need{\par % |
37713 | 746 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally |
747 %% if the depth of the box does not fit. | |
748 %{\baselineskip=0pt% | |
749 %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak | |
750 %\prevdepth=-1000pt | |
751 %}} | |
752 | |
69769 | 753 \parseargdef\need{% |
37713 | 754 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a |
755 % paragraph. | |
756 \par | |
757 % | |
758 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. | |
759 \dimen0 = #1\mil | |
760 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox | |
761 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox | |
762 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 | |
763 % | |
764 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the | |
765 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. | |
766 % And a page break here is fine. | |
767 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% | |
768 % | |
769 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the | |
770 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the | |
771 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider | |
772 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the | |
773 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. | |
774 % | |
775 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the | |
776 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in | |
777 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which | |
778 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing | |
779 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an | |
780 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real | |
781 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. | |
782 \penalty9999 | |
783 % | |
784 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. | |
785 \kern -#1\mil | |
786 % | |
787 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. | |
788 \nobreak | |
789 \fi | |
790 } | |
791 | |
69769 | 792 % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). |
37713 | 793 |
794 \let\br = \par | |
795 | |
69769 | 796 % @page forces the start of a new page. |
37713 | 797 % |
798 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} | |
799 | |
800 % @exdent text.... | |
801 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin | |
802 | |
803 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. | |
804 % That's how much \exdent should take out. | |
805 \newskip\exdentamount | |
806 | |
807 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. | |
69769 | 808 \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} |
37713 | 809 |
810 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. | |
69769 | 811 \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount |
812 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} | |
37713 | 813 |
814 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current | |
815 % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion | |
816 % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. | |
817 % | |
818 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm | |
819 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} | |
820 % | |
821 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% | |
822 \nobreak | |
823 \kern-\strutdepth | |
824 \vtop to \strutdepth{% | |
825 \baselineskip=\strutdepth | |
826 \vss | |
827 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to | |
828 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. | |
829 \ifx#1l% | |
830 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% | |
831 \else | |
832 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% | |
833 \fi | |
834 \null | |
835 }% | |
836 }} | |
837 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} | |
838 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} | |
839 % | |
840 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} | |
841 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; | |
842 % else use TEXT for both). | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
843 % |
37713 | 844 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} |
845 \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
846 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
37713 | 847 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt |
848 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts | |
849 \def\righttext{#2}% | |
850 \else | |
851 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text | |
852 \def\righttext{#1}% | |
853 \fi | |
854 % | |
855 \ifodd\pageno | |
856 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin | |
857 \else | |
858 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% | |
859 \fi | |
860 \temp | |
861 } | |
862 | |
863 % @include file insert text of that file as input. | |
69769 | 864 % |
865 \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} | |
866 \def\includezzz#1{% | |
867 \pushthisfilestack | |
37713 | 868 \def\thisfile{#1}% |
69769 | 869 {% |
870 \makevalueexpandable | |
871 \def\temp{\input #1 }% | |
872 \expandafter | |
873 }\temp | |
874 \popthisfilestack | |
875 } | |
876 \def\filenamecatcodes{% | |
877 \catcode`\\=\other | |
878 \catcode`~=\other | |
879 \catcode`^=\other | |
880 \catcode`_=\other | |
881 \catcode`|=\other | |
882 \catcode`<=\other | |
883 \catcode`>=\other | |
884 \catcode`+=\other | |
885 \catcode`-=\other | |
886 } | |
887 | |
888 \def\pushthisfilestack{% | |
889 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm | |
890 } | |
891 \def\pushthisfilestackX{% | |
892 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm | |
893 } | |
894 \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% | |
895 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% | |
896 } | |
897 | |
898 \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} | |
899 \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: | |
900 the stack of filenames is empty.}} | |
37713 | 901 |
902 \def\thisfile{} | |
903 | |
69769 | 904 % @center line |
905 % outputs that line, centered. | |
906 % | |
907 \parseargdef\center{% | |
908 \ifhmode | |
909 \let\next\centerH | |
910 \else | |
911 \let\next\centerV | |
912 \fi | |
913 \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% | |
914 } | |
915 \def\centerH#1{% | |
916 {% | |
917 \hfil\break | |
918 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip | |
919 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | |
920 \line{#1}% | |
921 \break | |
922 }% | |
923 } | |
924 \def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} | |
37713 | 925 |
926 % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space | |
927 | |
69769 | 928 \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} |
37713 | 929 |
930 % @comment ...line which is ignored... | |
931 % @c is the same as @comment | |
932 % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment | |
933 | |
934 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% | |
935 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% | |
936 \commentxxx} | |
937 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} | |
938 | |
939 \let\c=\comment | |
940 | |
941 % @paragraphindent NCHARS | |
942 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. | |
69769 | 943 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. |
944 % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
945 % |
37713 | 946 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords |
947 \def\noneword{none} | |
948 % | |
69769 | 949 \parseargdef\paragraphindent{% |
37713 | 950 \def\temp{#1}% |
951 \ifx\temp\asisword | |
952 \else | |
953 \ifx\temp\noneword | |
954 \defaultparindent = 0pt | |
955 \else | |
956 \defaultparindent = #1em | |
957 \fi | |
958 \fi | |
959 \parindent = \defaultparindent | |
960 } | |
961 | |
962 % @exampleindent NCHARS | |
963 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. | |
964 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but | |
965 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. | |
69769 | 966 \parseargdef\exampleindent{% |
37713 | 967 \def\temp{#1}% |
968 \ifx\temp\asisword | |
969 \else | |
970 \ifx\temp\noneword | |
971 \lispnarrowing = 0pt | |
972 \else | |
973 \lispnarrowing = #1em | |
974 \fi | |
975 \fi | |
976 } | |
977 | |
69769 | 978 % @firstparagraphindent WORD |
979 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph | |
980 % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such | |
981 % paragraphs. | |
982 % | |
983 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling | |
984 % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. | |
985 % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. | |
986 % By default, we suppress indentation. | |
987 % | |
988 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
989 \def\insertword{insert} | |
990 % | |
991 \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% | |
992 \def\temp{#1}% | |
993 \ifx\temp\noneword | |
994 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent | |
995 \else\ifx\temp\insertword | |
996 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax | |
997 \else | |
998 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
999 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% | |
1000 \fi\fi | |
1001 } | |
1002 | |
1003 % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to | |
1004 % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. | |
1005 % | |
1006 % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next | |
1007 % paragraph. | |
1008 % | |
1009 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% | |
1010 \gdef\indent{% | |
1011 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1012 \indent | |
1013 }% | |
1014 \gdef\noindent{% | |
1015 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1016 \noindent | |
1017 }% | |
1018 \global\everypar = {% | |
1019 \kern -\parindent | |
1020 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1021 }% | |
1022 } | |
1023 | |
1024 \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% | |
1025 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent | |
1026 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent | |
1027 \global \everypar = {}% | |
1028 } | |
1029 | |
1030 | |
37713 | 1031 % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. |
1032 % | |
1033 \def\asis#1{#1} | |
1034 | |
47284 | 1035 % @math outputs its argument in math mode. |
1036 % | |
1037 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean | |
1038 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make | |
69769 | 1039 % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, |
1040 % which is what @var uses. | |
1041 { | |
1042 \catcode`\_ = \active | |
1043 \gdef\mathunderscore{% | |
1044 \catcode`\_=\active | |
1045 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% | |
1046 } | |
1047 } | |
47284 | 1048 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. |
1049 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but | |
1050 % this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not | |
1051 % otherwise define @\. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
1052 % |
47284 | 1053 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. |
1054 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} | |
1055 % | |
1056 \def\math{% | |
1057 \tex | |
69769 | 1058 \mathunderscore |
47284 | 1059 \let\\ = \mathbackslash |
69769 | 1060 \mathactive |
1061 $\finishmath | |
1062 } | |
1063 \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. | |
1064 | |
1065 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. | |
1066 % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument | |
1067 % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). | |
1068 % | |
1069 { | |
1070 \catcode`^ = \active | |
1071 \catcode`< = \active | |
1072 \catcode`> = \active | |
1073 \catcode`+ = \active | |
1074 \gdef\mathactive{% | |
1075 \let^ = \ptexhat | |
1076 \let< = \ptexless | |
1077 \let> = \ptexgtr | |
1078 \let+ = \ptexplus | |
1079 } | |
1080 } | |
37713 | 1081 |
1082 % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. | |
69769 | 1083 \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} |
1084 \def\minus{$-$} | |
1085 | |
1086 % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. | |
1087 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter | |
1088 % font as three actual period characters. | |
1089 % | |
1090 \def\dots{% | |
1091 \leavevmode | |
1092 \hbox to 1.5em{% | |
1093 \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil | |
1094 .\hfil.\hfil.% | |
1095 \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil | |
1096 }% | |
1097 } | |
1098 | |
1099 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. | |
1100 % | |
1101 \def\enddots{% | |
1102 \dots | |
1103 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor | |
1104 } | |
1105 | |
1106 % @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up | |
1107 % Texinfo's parsing. | |
1108 % | |
1109 \let\comma = , | |
37713 | 1110 |
1111 % @refill is a no-op. | |
1112 \let\refill=\relax | |
1113 | |
1114 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to | |
1115 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. | |
1116 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). | |
1117 % | |
1118 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. | |
1119 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse | |
1120 | |
1121 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. | |
1122 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. | |
1123 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. | |
1124 \def\setfilename{% | |
69769 | 1125 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. |
37713 | 1126 \iflinks |
69769 | 1127 \tryauxfile |
1128 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. | |
1129 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux | |
37713 | 1130 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. |
1131 \openindices | |
69769 | 1132 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. |
37713 | 1133 % |
1134 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. | |
1135 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. | |
1136 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf | |
69769 | 1137 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi |
1138 \closein 1 | |
37713 | 1139 % |
1140 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. | |
1141 } | |
1142 | |
1143 % Called from \setfilename. | |
1144 % | |
1145 \def\openindices{% | |
1146 \newindex{cp}% | |
1147 \newcodeindex{fn}% | |
1148 \newcodeindex{vr}% | |
1149 \newcodeindex{tp}% | |
1150 \newcodeindex{ky}% | |
1151 \newcodeindex{pg}% | |
1152 } | |
1153 | |
1154 % @bye. | |
1155 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} | |
1156 | |
1157 | |
1158 \message{pdf,} | |
1159 % adobe `portable' document format | |
1160 \newcount\tempnum | |
1161 \newcount\lnkcount | |
1162 \newtoks\filename | |
1163 \newcount\filenamelength | |
1164 \newcount\pgn | |
1165 \newtoks\toksA | |
1166 \newtoks\toksB | |
1167 \newtoks\toksC | |
1168 \newtoks\toksD | |
1169 \newbox\boxA | |
1170 \newcount\countA | |
1171 \newif\ifpdf | |
1172 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest | |
1173 | |
69769 | 1174 % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 |
1175 % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, | |
1176 % borrowed from ifpdf.sty. | |
37713 | 1177 \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined |
1178 \else | |
69769 | 1179 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax |
1180 \else | |
1181 \ifcase\pdfoutput | |
1182 \else | |
1183 \pdftrue | |
1184 \fi | |
1185 \fi | |
1186 \fi | |
1187 | |
1188 % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, | |
1189 % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to | |
1190 % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be | |
1191 % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. | |
1192 % http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html | |
1193 % (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX | |
1194 % user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so | |
1195 % that's what we do). | |
1196 | |
1197 % double active backslashes. | |
1198 % | |
1199 {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active | |
1200 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{% | |
1201 @catcode`@\=@active | |
1202 @let\=@doublebackslash} | |
1203 } | |
1204 | |
1205 % To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are | |
1206 % not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as | |
1207 % us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens. I've | |
1208 % tinkered with it a little for texinfo, but it's definitely from there. | |
1209 % | |
1210 % #1 is the tokens to replace. | |
1211 % #2 is the replacement. | |
1212 % #3 is the control sequence with the string. | |
1213 % | |
1214 \def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{% | |
1215 \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{% | |
1216 ##1% | |
1217 \ifx\\##2\\% | |
1218 \else | |
1219 #2% | |
1220 \HyReturnAfterFi{% | |
1221 \HyPsdReplace##2\END | |
1222 }% | |
1223 \fi | |
1224 }% | |
1225 \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}% | |
1226 } | |
1227 \long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1} | |
1228 | |
1229 % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements. | |
1230 \def\backslashparens#1{% | |
1231 \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply | |
1232 % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest. | |
1233 \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}% | |
1234 \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}% | |
1235 } | |
1236 | |
1237 \ifpdf | |
37713 | 1238 \input pdfcolor |
69769 | 1239 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}% |
70570 | 1240 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). |
37713 | 1241 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% |
70570 | 1242 \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
1243 \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | |
47284 | 1244 % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is |
1245 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) | |
37713 | 1246 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 |
47284 | 1247 \immediate\pdfimage |
37713 | 1248 \else |
47284 | 1249 \immediate\pdfximage |
37713 | 1250 \fi |
70570 | 1251 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi |
1252 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi | |
37713 | 1253 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 |
69769 | 1254 #1.pdf% |
37713 | 1255 \else |
1256 {#1.pdf}% | |
1257 \fi | |
1258 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else | |
1259 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage | |
1260 \fi} | |
69769 | 1261 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% |
1262 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters | |
1263 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. | |
1264 \atdummies | |
1265 \activebackslashdouble | |
1266 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% | |
1267 \backslashparens\pdfdestname | |
1268 \pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz% | |
1269 }}% | |
1270 % | |
1271 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. | |
1272 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}% | |
1273 % | |
37713 | 1274 \let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light? |
1275 \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink} | |
1276 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines | |
1277 % come from Petr Olsak | |
1278 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% | |
1279 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} | |
1280 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax | |
69769 | 1281 \advance\tempnum by 1 |
37713 | 1282 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} |
69769 | 1283 % |
1284 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the | |
1285 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number | |
1286 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, | |
1287 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. | |
1288 % #4 is the page number | |
1289 % | |
1290 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% | |
1291 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the | |
1292 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section | |
1293 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't | |
1294 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. | |
1295 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% | |
1296 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty | |
1297 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% | |
1298 \else | |
1299 % Doubled backslashes in the name. | |
1300 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% | |
1301 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}% | |
1302 \fi | |
1303 % | |
1304 % Also double the backslashes in the display string. | |
1305 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% | |
1306 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}% | |
1307 % | |
1308 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% | |
1309 } | |
1310 % | |
1311 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% | |
1312 \begingroup | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
1313 % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks |
37713 | 1314 \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace |
1315 \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace | |
1316 % | |
69769 | 1317 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. |
1318 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1319 \def\thischapnum{##2}% | |
1320 \def\thissecnum{0}% | |
1321 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
1322 }% | |
1323 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1324 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% | |
1325 \def\thissecnum{##2}% | |
1326 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
1327 }% | |
1328 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1329 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% | |
1330 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% | |
1331 }% | |
1332 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1333 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% | |
1334 }% | |
1335 \def\thischapnum{0}% | |
1336 \def\thissecnum{0}% | |
1337 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
1338 % | |
1339 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et | |
1340 % al. a second time, below. | |
1341 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% | |
1342 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% | |
1343 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | |
1344 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | |
1345 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% | |
1346 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% | |
1347 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | |
1348 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | |
1349 \readdatafile{toc}% | |
1350 % | |
1351 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. | |
1352 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of | |
1353 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. | |
1354 % | |
1355 % We use the node names as the destinations. | |
1356 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1357 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1358 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1359 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1360 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1361 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1362 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero | |
1363 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1364 % | |
1365 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of | |
1366 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, | |
1367 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from | |
1368 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from | |
1369 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. | |
1370 % | |
1371 % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to | |
1372 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right | |
1373 % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. | |
1374 \indexnofonts | |
1375 \setupdatafile | |
1376 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash | |
37713 | 1377 \input \jobname.toc |
69769 | 1378 \endgroup |
37713 | 1379 } |
69769 | 1380 % |
37713 | 1381 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% |
1382 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax | |
1383 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces | |
1384 \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% | |
1385 \advance\filenamelength by 1 | |
1386 \fi | |
1387 \fi | |
1388 \nextsp} | |
1389 \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} | |
1390 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 | |
1391 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink | |
1392 \else | |
1393 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink | |
1394 \fi | |
69769 | 1395 % make a live url in pdf output. |
37713 | 1396 \def\pdfurl#1{% |
1397 \begingroup | |
69769 | 1398 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not |
1399 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context | |
1400 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one | |
1401 % people have actually reported a problem with. | |
1402 % | |
1403 \normalturnoffactive | |
1404 \def\@{@}% | |
1405 \let\/=\empty | |
1406 \makevalueexpandable | |
37713 | 1407 \leavevmode\Red |
1408 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | |
1409 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% | |
1410 \endgroup} | |
1411 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} | |
1412 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} | |
1413 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} | |
1414 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} | |
1415 \def\maketoks{% | |
69769 | 1416 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax |
37713 | 1417 \ifx\first0\adn0 |
1418 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 | |
1419 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
1420 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 |
37713 | 1421 \else |
1422 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi | |
1423 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else | |
1424 \let\next=\maketoks | |
1425 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} | |
1426 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi | |
1427 \fi | |
1428 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | |
1429 \next} | |
1430 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% | |
1431 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} | |
1432 \def\pdflink#1{% | |
47284 | 1433 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} |
37713 | 1434 \linkcolor #1\endlink} |
1435 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} | |
69769 | 1436 \else |
1437 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble | |
1438 \let\pdfurl = \gobble | |
1439 \let\endlink = \relax | |
1440 \let\linkcolor = \relax | |
1441 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax | |
1442 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput | |
37713 | 1443 |
1444 | |
1445 \message{fonts,} | |
69769 | 1446 |
1447 % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. | |
1448 % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in | |
1449 % italics, not bold italics. | |
1450 % | |
1451 \def\setfontstyle#1{% | |
1452 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. | |
1453 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font | |
1454 } | |
1455 | |
1456 % Select #1 fonts with the current style. | |
1457 % | |
1458 \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} | |
1459 | |
1460 \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} | |
1461 \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} | |
1462 \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} | |
1463 \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} | |
1464 \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} | |
37713 | 1465 |
1466 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. | |
69769 | 1467 % So we set up a \sf. |
37713 | 1468 \newfam\sffam |
69769 | 1469 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} |
37713 | 1470 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. |
1471 | |
69769 | 1472 % We don't need math for this font style. |
1473 \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} | |
37713 | 1474 |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1475 |
47284 | 1476 % Default leading. |
1477 \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt | |
1478 | |
1479 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size | |
1480 % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers | |
1481 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. | |
1482 % | |
1483 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} | |
1484 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} | |
1485 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} | |
1486 % | |
1487 \def\setleading#1{% | |
1488 \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax | |
1489 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip | |
1490 \normalbaselines | |
1491 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% | |
1492 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip | |
1493 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip | |
1494 }% | |
1495 } | |
37713 | 1496 |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1497 |
37713 | 1498 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the |
1499 % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). | |
1500 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor | |
1501 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4} | |
1502 | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1503 |
37713 | 1504 % Use cm as the default font prefix. |
1505 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix | |
1506 % before you read in texinfo.tex. | |
1507 \ifx\fontprefix\undefined | |
1508 \def\fontprefix{cm} | |
1509 \fi | |
1510 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. | |
1511 \def\rmshape{r} | |
1512 \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold | |
1513 \def\bfshape{b} | |
1514 \def\bxshape{bx} | |
1515 \def\ttshape{tt} | |
1516 \def\ttbshape{tt} | |
1517 \def\ttslshape{sltt} | |
1518 \def\itshape{ti} | |
1519 \def\itbshape{bxti} | |
1520 \def\slshape{sl} | |
1521 \def\slbshape{bxsl} | |
1522 \def\sfshape{ss} | |
1523 \def\sfbshape{ss} | |
1524 \def\scshape{csc} | |
1525 \def\scbshape{csc} | |
1526 | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1527 % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1528 % Texinfo. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1529 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1530 \def\definetextfontsizexi{ |
69769 | 1531 % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). |
1532 \def\textnominalsize{11pt} | |
1533 \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} | |
1534 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1535 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
37713 | 1536 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
1537 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1538 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1539 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1540 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1541 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1542 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep | |
1543 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep | |
1544 | |
69769 | 1545 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. |
1546 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} | |
37713 | 1547 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} |
69769 | 1548 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1} |
1549 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} | |
37713 | 1550 |
1551 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). | |
69769 | 1552 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} |
37713 | 1553 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000} |
1554 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000} | |
1555 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900} | |
1556 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000} | |
1557 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000} | |
1558 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000} | |
1559 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900} | |
1560 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} | |
1561 \font\smalli=cmmi9 | |
1562 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 | |
1563 | |
47284 | 1564 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). |
69769 | 1565 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} |
47284 | 1566 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000} |
1567 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000} | |
1568 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800} | |
1569 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000} | |
1570 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000} | |
1571 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000} | |
1572 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800} | |
1573 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800} | |
1574 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 | |
1575 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 | |
1576 | |
69769 | 1577 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): |
1578 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} | |
37713 | 1579 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} |
1580 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} | |
1581 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} | |
1582 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} | |
1583 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} | |
1584 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} | |
1585 \let\titlebf=\titlerm | |
1586 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} | |
1587 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 | |
1588 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 | |
1589 \def\authorrm{\secrm} | |
69769 | 1590 \def\authortt{\sectt} |
37713 | 1591 |
1592 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). | |
69769 | 1593 \def\chapnominalsize{17pt} |
37713 | 1594 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} |
1595 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3} | |
1596 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} | |
1597 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} | |
1598 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} | |
1599 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000} | |
1600 \let\chapbf=\chaprm | |
1601 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} | |
1602 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 | |
1603 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 | |
1604 | |
1605 % Section fonts (14.4pt). | |
69769 | 1606 \def\secnominalsize{14pt} |
37713 | 1607 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} |
1608 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} | |
1609 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} | |
1610 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} | |
1611 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} | |
1612 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} | |
1613 \let\secbf\secrm | |
1614 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} | |
1615 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 | |
1616 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 | |
1617 | |
1618 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). | |
69769 | 1619 \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} |
37713 | 1620 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf} |
1621 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} | |
1622 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} | |
1623 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | |
1624 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315} | |
1625 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | |
1626 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm | |
69769 | 1627 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315} |
37713 | 1628 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf |
1629 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 | |
69769 | 1630 |
1631 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). | |
1632 \def\reducednominalsize{10pt} | |
1633 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000} | |
1634 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000} | |
1635 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000} | |
1636 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000} | |
1637 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000} | |
1638 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000} | |
1639 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000} | |
1640 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000} | |
1641 \font\reducedi=cmmi10 | |
1642 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10 | |
37713 | 1643 |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1644 % reset the current fonts |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1645 \textfonts |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1646 \rm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1647 } % end of 11pt text font size definitions |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1648 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1649 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1650 % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1651 % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1652 % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1653 % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1654 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1655 \def\definetextfontsizex{% |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1656 % Text fonts (10pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1657 \def\textnominalsize{10pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1658 \edef\mainmagstep{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1659 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1660 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1661 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1662 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1663 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1664 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1665 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1666 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1667 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1668 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1669 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1670 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1671 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1672 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1673 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1674 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1675 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1676 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1677 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1678 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1679 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1680 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1681 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1682 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1683 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1684 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1685 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1686 \font\smalli=cmmi9 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1687 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1688 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1689 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1690 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1691 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1692 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1693 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1694 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1695 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1696 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1697 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1698 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1699 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1700 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1701 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1702 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1703 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1704 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1705 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1706 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1707 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1708 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1709 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1710 \let\titlebf=\titlerm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1711 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1712 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1713 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1714 \def\authorrm{\secrm} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1715 \def\authortt{\sectt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1716 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1717 % Chapter fonts (14.4pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1718 \def\chapnominalsize{14pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1719 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1720 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1721 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1722 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1723 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1724 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1725 \let\chapbf\chaprm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1726 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1727 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1728 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1729 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1730 % Section fonts (12pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1731 \def\secnominalsize{12pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1732 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1733 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1734 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1735 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1736 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1737 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1738 \let\secbf\secrm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1739 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1740 \font\seci=cmmi12 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1741 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1742 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1743 % Subsection fonts (10pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1744 \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1745 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1746 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1747 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1748 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1749 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1750 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1751 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1752 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1753 \font\sseci=cmmi10 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1754 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1755 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1756 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1757 \def\reducednominalsize{9pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1758 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1759 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1760 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1761 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1762 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1763 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1764 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1765 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1766 \font\reducedi=cmmi9 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1767 \font\reducedsy=cmsy9 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1768 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1769 % reduce space between paragraphs |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1770 \divide\parskip by 2 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1771 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1772 % reset the current fonts |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1773 \textfonts |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1774 \rm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1775 } % end of 10pt text font size definitions |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1776 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1777 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1778 % We provide the user-level command |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1779 % @fonttextsize 10 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1780 % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1781 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1782 \def\xword{10} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1783 \def\xiword{11} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1784 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1785 \parseargdef\fonttextsize{% |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1786 \def\textsizearg{#1}% |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1787 \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1788 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1789 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1790 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1791 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1792 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1793 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1794 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1795 \else |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1796 \errhelp=\EMsimple |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1797 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1798 \fi\fi |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1799 \endgroup |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1800 } |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1801 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1802 |
37713 | 1803 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, |
1804 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since | |
47284 | 1805 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except |
1806 % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and | |
1807 % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). | |
37713 | 1808 % |
1809 \def\resetmathfonts{% | |
47284 | 1810 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy |
1811 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf | |
1812 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf | |
1813 } | |
37713 | 1814 |
1815 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead | |
69769 | 1816 % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the |
1817 % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire | |
1818 % \tenSTYLE to set the current font. | |
1819 % | |
1820 % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) | |
1821 % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in | |
1822 % the LaTeX logo and acronyms. | |
1823 % | |
1824 % This all needs generalizing, badly. | |
1825 % | |
37713 | 1826 \def\textfonts{% |
1827 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl | |
1828 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc | |
69769 | 1829 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy |
1830 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl | |
1831 \def\curfontsize{text}% | |
1832 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
47284 | 1833 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} |
37713 | 1834 \def\titlefonts{% |
1835 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl | |
1836 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc | |
1837 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy | |
1838 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl | |
69769 | 1839 \def\curfontsize{title}% |
1840 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% | |
37713 | 1841 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} |
1842 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} | |
1843 \def\chapfonts{% | |
1844 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl | |
1845 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc | |
69769 | 1846 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy |
1847 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl | |
1848 \def\curfontsize{chap}% | |
1849 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% | |
37713 | 1850 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} |
1851 \def\secfonts{% | |
1852 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl | |
1853 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc | |
69769 | 1854 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy |
1855 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl | |
1856 \def\curfontsize{sec}% | |
1857 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% | |
37713 | 1858 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} |
1859 \def\subsecfonts{% | |
1860 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl | |
1861 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc | |
69769 | 1862 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy |
1863 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl | |
1864 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% | |
1865 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% | |
37713 | 1866 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} |
69769 | 1867 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts |
1868 \def\reducedfonts{% | |
1869 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl | |
1870 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc | |
1871 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy | |
1872 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl | |
1873 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% | |
1874 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
1875 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} | |
37713 | 1876 \def\smallfonts{% |
1877 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl | |
1878 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc | |
1879 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy | |
1880 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl | |
69769 | 1881 \def\curfontsize{small}% |
1882 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
47284 | 1883 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} |
1884 \def\smallerfonts{% | |
1885 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl | |
1886 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc | |
1887 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy | |
1888 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl | |
69769 | 1889 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% |
1890 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
47284 | 1891 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} |
69769 | 1892 |
1893 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. | |
1894 \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts | |
1895 | |
1896 % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample | |
1897 % can fit this many characters: | |
1898 % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 | |
1899 % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: | |
1900 % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 | |
1901 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth | |
1902 % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. | |
1903 % | |
1904 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): | |
1905 % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 | |
1906 % | |
1907 % I wish the USA used A4 paper. | |
1908 % --karl, 24jan03. | |
1909 | |
37713 | 1910 |
1911 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. | |
1912 % | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1913 \definetextfontsizexi |
37713 | 1914 |
1915 % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. | |
1916 \def\angleleft{$\langle$} | |
1917 \def\angleright{$\rangle$} | |
1918 | |
1919 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks | |
1920 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 | |
1921 | |
1922 % Fonts for short table of contents. | |
1923 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000} | |
69769 | 1924 \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} % no cmb12 |
37713 | 1925 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000} |
69769 | 1926 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000} |
37713 | 1927 |
1928 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans | |
1929 %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic | |
1930 | |
1931 % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction | |
1932 % unless the following character is such as not to need one. | |
69769 | 1933 \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else |
1934 \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} | |
1935 \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
1936 \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
1937 | |
1938 % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. | |
1939 % @var is set to this for defun arguments. | |
1940 \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
1941 | |
1942 % like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want | |
1943 % ttsl for book titles, do we? | |
1944 \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
37713 | 1945 |
1946 \let\i=\smartitalic | |
69769 | 1947 \let\slanted=\smartslanted |
37713 | 1948 \let\var=\smartslanted |
1949 \let\dfn=\smartslanted | |
1950 \let\emph=\smartitalic | |
69769 | 1951 |
1952 % @b, explicit bold. | |
37713 | 1953 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} |
1954 \let\strong=\b | |
1955 | |
69769 | 1956 % @sansserif, explicit sans. |
1957 \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} | |
1958 | |
37713 | 1959 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at |
1960 % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the | |
1961 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. | |
1962 % | |
1963 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} | |
1964 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } | |
1965 | |
69769 | 1966 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. |
1967 % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and | |
1968 % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. | |
1969 % | |
1970 \chardef\colonChar = `\: | |
1971 \chardef\commaChar = `\, | |
1972 \chardef\dotChar = `\. | |
1973 \chardef\exclamChar= `\! | |
1974 \chardef\questChar = `\? | |
1975 \chardef\semiChar = `\; | |
1976 % | |
1977 \catcode`@=11 | |
1978 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% | |
1979 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m | |
1980 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m | |
1981 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends | |
1982 } | |
1983 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% | |
1984 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 | |
1985 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 | |
1986 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends | |
1987 } | |
1988 \catcode`@=\other | |
1989 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default | |
1990 | |
37713 | 1991 \def\t#1{% |
69769 | 1992 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% |
37713 | 1993 \null |
1994 } | |
1995 \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} | |
1996 \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000} | |
1997 \font\keysy=cmsy9 | |
1998 \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% | |
1999 \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% | |
2000 \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt | |
2001 \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% | |
2002 \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% | |
2003 \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} | |
2004 % The old definition, with no lozenge: | |
2005 %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} | |
2006 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} | |
2007 | |
2008 % @file, @option are the same as @samp. | |
2009 \let\file=\samp | |
2010 \let\option=\samp | |
2011 | |
2012 % @code is a modification of @t, | |
2013 % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. | |
2014 \def\tclose#1{% | |
2015 {% | |
2016 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. | |
2017 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font | |
2018 % | |
2019 % Switch to typewriter. | |
2020 \tt | |
2021 % | |
2022 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. | |
2023 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% | |
2024 % | |
2025 % Turn off hyphenation. | |
2026 \nohyphenation | |
2027 % | |
2028 \rawbackslash | |
69769 | 2029 \plainfrenchspacing |
37713 | 2030 #1% |
2031 }% | |
2032 \null | |
2033 } | |
2034 | |
69769 | 2035 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. |
37713 | 2036 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes |
2037 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. | |
2038 | |
2039 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control | |
2040 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. | |
2041 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) | |
2042 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. | |
2043 % -- rms. | |
2044 { | |
2045 \catcode`\-=\active | |
2046 \catcode`\_=\active | |
2047 % | |
2048 \global\def\code{\begingroup | |
69769 | 2049 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active |
2050 \ifallowcodebreaks | |
2051 \let-\codedash | |
2052 \let_\codeunder | |
2053 \else | |
2054 \let-\realdash | |
2055 \let_\realunder | |
2056 \fi | |
37713 | 2057 \codex |
2058 } | |
2059 } | |
2060 | |
2061 \def\realdash{-} | |
2062 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} | |
47284 | 2063 \def\codeunder{% |
2064 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ | |
2065 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) | |
2066 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us | |
2067 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. | |
2068 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode | |
2069 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. | |
2070 \else\normalunderscore \fi | |
2071 \discretionary{}{}{}}% | |
2072 {\_}% | |
2073 } | |
37713 | 2074 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} |
2075 | |
69769 | 2076 % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., |
2077 % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in | |
2078 % some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in | |
2079 % general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. | |
2080 % | |
2081 \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue | |
2082 | |
2083 \def\keywordtrue{true} | |
2084 \def\keywordfalse{false} | |
2085 | |
2086 \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% | |
2087 \def\txiarg{#1}% | |
2088 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue | |
2089 \allowcodebreakstrue | |
2090 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse | |
2091 \allowcodebreaksfalse | |
2092 \else | |
2093 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
2094 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}% | |
2095 \fi\fi | |
2096 } | |
2097 | |
37713 | 2098 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, |
2099 % then @kbd has no effect. | |
2100 | |
2101 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), | |
2102 % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), | |
2103 % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). | |
69769 | 2104 \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% |
2105 \def\txiarg{#1}% | |
2106 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct | |
37713 | 2107 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% |
69769 | 2108 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample |
37713 | 2109 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
69769 | 2110 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode |
37713 | 2111 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
69769 | 2112 \else |
2113 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
2114 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}% | |
37713 | 2115 \fi\fi\fi |
2116 } | |
2117 \def\worddistinct{distinct} | |
2118 \def\wordexample{example} | |
2119 \def\wordcode{code} | |
2120 | |
69769 | 2121 % Default is `distinct.' |
2122 \kbdinputstyle distinct | |
37713 | 2123 |
2124 \def\xkey{\key} | |
2125 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% | |
2126 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% | |
2127 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi | |
2128 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} | |
2129 | |
69769 | 2130 % For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. |
2131 \let\indicateurl=\code | |
37713 | 2132 \let\env=\code |
2133 \let\command=\code | |
2134 | |
2135 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) | |
2136 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third | |
2137 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url | |
2138 % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in | |
2139 % a hypertex \special here. | |
2140 % | |
2141 \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} | |
2142 \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup | |
2143 \unsepspaces | |
2144 \pdfurl{#1}% | |
2145 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | |
2146 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | |
2147 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that | |
2148 \else | |
2149 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | |
2150 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | |
2151 \ifpdf | |
2152 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it | |
2153 \else | |
2154 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url | |
2155 \fi | |
2156 \else | |
2157 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it | |
2158 \fi | |
2159 \fi | |
2160 \endlink | |
2161 \endgroup} | |
2162 | |
69769 | 2163 % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. |
2164 % | |
2165 \let\url=\uref | |
2166 | |
37713 | 2167 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. |
2168 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
2169 % |
37713 | 2170 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} |
2171 \ifpdf | |
2172 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} | |
2173 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup | |
2174 \unsepspaces | |
2175 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% | |
2176 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | |
2177 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi | |
2178 \endlink | |
2179 \endgroup} | |
2180 \else | |
2181 \let\email=\uref | |
2182 \fi | |
2183 | |
2184 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the | |
2185 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and | |
2186 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have | |
2187 % this property, we can check that font parameter. | |
2188 % | |
2189 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } | |
2190 | |
2191 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the | |
2192 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. | |
2193 % | |
2194 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} | |
2195 | |
2196 \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} | |
2197 | |
2198 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', | |
2199 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for | |
2200 % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. | |
2201 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} | |
2202 | |
2203 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. | |
2204 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font | |
2205 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font | |
2206 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font | |
2207 | |
69769 | 2208 % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. |
2209 % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for | |
2210 % all-uppercase. | |
2211 % | |
2212 \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} | |
2213 \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% | |
2214 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% | |
2215 \def\temp{#2}% | |
2216 \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
2217 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% | |
2218 \fi | |
2219 } | |
2220 | |
2221 % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. | |
2222 % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. | |
2223 % | |
2224 \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} | |
2225 \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% | |
2226 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% | |
2227 \def\temp{#2}% | |
2228 \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
2229 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% | |
2230 \fi | |
2231 } | |
2232 | |
2233 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. | |
2234 % | |
37713 | 2235 \def\pounds{{\it\$}} |
2236 | |
69769 | 2237 % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. |
2238 % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik | |
2239 % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and | |
2240 % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). | |
2241 % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. | |
2242 % | |
2243 % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore | |
2244 % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular | |
2245 % font height. | |
2246 % | |
2247 % feymr - regular | |
2248 % feymo - slanted | |
2249 % feybr - bold | |
2250 % feybo - bold slanted | |
2251 % | |
2252 % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. | |
2253 % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. | |
2254 % Hmm. | |
2255 % | |
2256 % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? | |
2257 % Hope not. | |
2258 % | |
2259 % | |
2260 \def\euro{{\eurofont e}} | |
2261 \def\eurofont{% | |
2262 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in | |
2263 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that | |
2264 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the | |
2265 % font installed. | |
2266 % | |
2267 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale | |
2268 % that to the current nominal size. | |
2269 % | |
2270 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but | |
2271 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. | |
2272 % | |
2273 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% | |
2274 % | |
2275 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename | |
2276 % bold: | |
2277 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize | |
2278 \else | |
2279 % regular: | |
2280 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize | |
2281 \fi | |
2282 \thiseurofont | |
2283 } | |
2284 | |
2285 % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really | |
2286 % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. | |
2287 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. | |
2288 % | |
2289 \def\registeredsymbol{% | |
2290 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% | |
2291 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% | |
2292 }$% | |
2293 } | |
2294 | |
2295 % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: | |
2296 % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 | |
2297 % so we'll define it if necessary. | |
2298 % | |
2299 \ifx\Orb\undefined | |
2300 \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} | |
2301 \fi | |
2302 | |
37713 | 2303 |
2304 \message{page headings,} | |
2305 | |
2306 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in | |
2307 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc | |
2308 | |
2309 % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. | |
2310 \newif\ifseenauthor | |
2311 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage | |
2312 | |
2313 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the | |
2314 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. | |
2315 % | |
2316 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2317 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | |
2318 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2319 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | |
2320 | |
69769 | 2321 \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% |
37713 | 2322 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} |
2323 | |
69769 | 2324 \envdef\titlepage{% |
2325 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. | |
2326 \begingroup | |
2327 \parindent=0pt \textfonts | |
2328 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. | |
2329 \vglue\titlepagetopglue | |
2330 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. | |
2331 \finishedtitlepagetrue | |
2332 % | |
2333 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space | |
2334 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. | |
2335 \let\oldpage = \page | |
2336 \def\page{% | |
37713 | 2337 \iffinishedtitlepage\else |
69769 | 2338 \finishtitlepage |
37713 | 2339 \fi |
2340 \let\page = \oldpage | |
69769 | 2341 \page |
2342 \null | |
2343 }% | |
37713 | 2344 } |
2345 | |
2346 \def\Etitlepage{% | |
69769 | 2347 \iffinishedtitlepage\else |
2348 \finishtitlepage | |
2349 \fi | |
2350 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, | |
2351 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. | |
2352 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page | |
2353 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. | |
2354 \oldpage | |
2355 \endgroup | |
2356 % | |
2357 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are | |
2358 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. | |
2359 \HEADINGSon | |
2360 % | |
2361 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. | |
2362 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2363 \shortcontents | |
2364 \contents | |
2365 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | |
2366 \global\let\contents = \relax | |
2367 \fi | |
2368 % | |
2369 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2370 \contents | |
2371 \global\let\contents = \relax | |
2372 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | |
2373 \fi | |
37713 | 2374 } |
2375 | |
2376 \def\finishtitlepage{% | |
69769 | 2377 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize |
2378 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue | |
2379 \finishedtitlepagetrue | |
2380 } | |
2381 | |
2382 %%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: | |
2383 | |
2384 \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm | |
2385 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} | |
2386 | |
2387 \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines | |
2388 \let\tt=\authortt} | |
2389 | |
2390 \parseargdef\title{% | |
2391 \checkenv\titlepage | |
2392 \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1} | |
2393 % print a rule at the page bottom also. | |
2394 \finishedtitlepagefalse | |
2395 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt | |
2396 } | |
2397 | |
2398 \parseargdef\subtitle{% | |
2399 \checkenv\titlepage | |
2400 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% | |
2401 } | |
2402 | |
2403 % @author should come last, but may come many times. | |
2404 % It can also be used inside @quotation. | |
2405 % | |
2406 \parseargdef\author{% | |
2407 \def\temp{\quotation}% | |
2408 \ifx\thisenv\temp | |
2409 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. | |
2410 \else | |
2411 \checkenv\titlepage | |
2412 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi | |
2413 {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}% | |
2414 \fi | |
2415 } | |
2416 | |
37713 | 2417 |
2418 %%% Set up page headings and footings. | |
2419 | |
2420 \let\thispage=\folio | |
2421 | |
2422 \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages | |
2423 \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages | |
2424 \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages | |
2425 \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages | |
2426 | |
69769 | 2427 % Now make TeX use those variables |
37713 | 2428 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline |
2429 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} | |
2430 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline | |
2431 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} | |
2432 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax | |
2433 | |
2434 % Commands to set those variables. | |
2435 % For example, this is what @headings on does | |
2436 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter | |
2437 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle | |
2438 % @evenfooting @thisfile|| | |
2439 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile | |
2440 | |
69769 | 2441 |
37713 | 2442 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} |
69769 | 2443 \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
2444 \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
2445 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | |
2446 | |
37713 | 2447 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} |
69769 | 2448 \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
2449 \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
2450 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | |
2451 | |
2452 \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% | |
37713 | 2453 |
2454 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} | |
69769 | 2455 \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
2456 \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
2457 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | |
2458 | |
37713 | 2459 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} |
69769 | 2460 \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
2461 \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
37713 | 2462 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% |
2463 % | |
2464 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume | |
2465 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. | |
2466 \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip | |
2467 \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip | |
2468 } | |
2469 | |
69769 | 2470 \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} |
2471 | |
37713 | 2472 |
2473 % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. | |
2474 % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. | |
2475 % @headings off turns them off. | |
2476 % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. | |
2477 % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. | |
2478 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. | |
2479 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. | |
2480 % By default, they are off at the start of a document, | |
2481 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. | |
2482 | |
2483 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} | |
2484 | |
69769 | 2485 \def\HEADINGSoff{% |
37713 | 2486 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
2487 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} | |
2488 \HEADINGSoff | |
2489 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. | |
2490 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, | |
2491 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document | |
2492 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top | |
2493 % edge of all pages. | |
69769 | 2494 \def\HEADINGSdouble{% |
37713 | 2495 \global\pageno=1 |
2496 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2497 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2498 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | |
2499 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2500 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | |
2501 } | |
2502 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
2503 | |
2504 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, | |
2505 % page number on top right. | |
69769 | 2506 \def\HEADINGSsingle{% |
37713 | 2507 \global\pageno=1 |
2508 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2509 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2510 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2511 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2512 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
2513 } | |
2514 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} | |
2515 | |
2516 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} | |
2517 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter | |
2518 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% | |
2519 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2520 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2521 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | |
2522 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2523 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | |
2524 } | |
2525 | |
2526 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} | |
2527 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% | |
2528 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2529 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2530 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2531 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2532 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
2533 } | |
2534 | |
2535 % Subroutines used in generating headings | |
2536 % This produces Day Month Year style of output. | |
2537 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set | |
2538 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). | |
2539 \ifx\today\undefined | |
2540 \def\today{% | |
2541 \number\day\space | |
2542 \ifcase\month | |
2543 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr | |
2544 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug | |
2545 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec | |
2546 \fi | |
2547 \space\number\year} | |
2548 \fi | |
2549 | |
2550 % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. | |
2551 % It generates no output of its own. | |
2552 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} | |
69769 | 2553 \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} |
37713 | 2554 |
2555 | |
2556 \message{tables,} | |
69769 | 2557 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). |
37713 | 2558 |
2559 % default indentation of table text | |
2560 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in | |
2561 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text | |
2562 \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in | |
2563 % margin between end of table item and start of table text. | |
2564 \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in | |
2565 | |
2566 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin | |
2567 \newdimen\itemmax | |
2568 | |
69769 | 2569 % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with |
37713 | 2570 % these defs. |
2571 % They also define \itemindex | |
2572 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). | |
2573 | |
2574 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip | |
2575 | |
2576 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} | |
2577 | |
2578 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} | |
2579 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} | |
2580 | |
2581 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % | |
2582 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | |
2583 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent | |
69769 | 2584 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% |
37713 | 2585 \itemindex{#1}% |
2586 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. | |
2587 % | |
2588 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line | |
2589 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that | |
2590 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next | |
2591 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the | |
2592 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. | |
2593 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax | |
2594 % | |
2595 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, | |
2596 % but leave it ragged-right. | |
2597 \begingroup | |
2598 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent | |
2599 \advance\hsize by\tableindent | |
2600 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil | |
2601 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par | |
2602 \endgroup | |
2603 % | |
2604 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the | |
2605 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. | |
2606 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip | |
2607 % | |
69769 | 2608 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if |
2609 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no | |
2610 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would | |
2611 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this | |
2612 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert | |
2613 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. | |
2614 % | |
2615 \penalty 10001 | |
37713 | 2616 \endgroup |
2617 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse | |
2618 \else | |
2619 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the | |
2620 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. | |
2621 \noindent | |
2622 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in | |
2623 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and | |
2624 % eventually be printed. | |
2625 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent | |
2626 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 | |
2627 \unhbox0 | |
2628 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 | |
2629 \endgroup | |
2630 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue | |
2631 \fi | |
2632 } | |
2633 | |
69769 | 2634 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} |
2635 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} | |
37713 | 2636 |
2637 % @table, @ftable, @vtable. | |
69769 | 2638 \envdef\table{% |
2639 \let\itemindex\gobble | |
2640 \tablecheck{table}% | |
2641 } | |
2642 \envdef\ftable{% | |
2643 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% | |
2644 \tablecheck{ftable}% | |
2645 } | |
2646 \envdef\vtable{% | |
2647 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% | |
2648 \tablecheck{vtable}% | |
2649 } | |
2650 \def\tablecheck#1{% | |
2651 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active | |
2652 \endgroup | |
2653 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is | |
2654 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% | |
2655 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% | |
2656 \else | |
2657 \let\next\tablex | |
2658 \fi | |
2659 \next | |
2660 } | |
2661 \def\tablex#1{% | |
2662 \def\itemindicate{#1}% | |
2663 \parsearg\tabley | |
2664 } | |
2665 \def\tabley#1{% | |
2666 {% | |
2667 \makevalueexpandable | |
2668 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% | |
2669 \expandafter | |
2670 }\temp \endtablez | |
2671 } | |
2672 \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% | |
2673 \aboveenvbreak | |
2674 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi | |
2675 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi | |
2676 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi | |
2677 \itemmax=\tableindent | |
2678 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin | |
2679 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent | |
2680 \exdentamount=\tableindent | |
2681 \parindent = 0pt | |
2682 \parskip = \smallskipamount | |
2683 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | |
2684 \let\item = \internalBitem | |
2685 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx | |
2686 } | |
2687 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} | |
2688 \let\Eftable\Etable | |
2689 \let\Evtable\Etable | |
2690 \let\Eitemize\Etable | |
2691 \let\Eenumerate\Etable | |
37713 | 2692 |
2693 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize | |
2694 | |
2695 \newcount \itemno | |
2696 | |
69769 | 2697 \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} |
2698 | |
2699 \def\doitemize#1{% | |
2700 \aboveenvbreak | |
2701 \itemmax=\itemindent | |
2702 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin | |
2703 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent | |
2704 \exdentamount=\itemindent | |
2705 \parindent=0pt | |
2706 \parskip=\smallskipamount | |
2707 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | |
2708 \def\itemcontents{#1}% | |
2709 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. | |
2710 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi | |
2711 \let\item=\itemizeitem | |
2712 } | |
2713 | |
2714 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. | |
2715 % | |
2716 \def\itemizeitem{% | |
2717 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations | |
2718 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break | |
2719 {% | |
2720 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a | |
2721 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have | |
2722 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero | |
2723 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the | |
2724 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there | |
2725 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much | |
2726 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least | |
2727 % that's the theory. | |
2728 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi | |
2729 \noindent | |
2730 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% | |
2731 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. | |
2732 \flushcr | |
2733 } | |
37713 | 2734 |
2735 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in | |
2736 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. | |
2737 % | |
2738 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% | |
2739 | |
2740 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, | |
2741 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No | |
2742 % argument is the same as `1'. | |
2743 % | |
69769 | 2744 \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} |
37713 | 2745 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% |
2746 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. | |
2747 \def\thearg{#1}% | |
2748 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi | |
2749 % | |
2750 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a | |
2751 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. | |
2752 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. | |
2753 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at | |
2754 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) | |
2755 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark | |
2756 \ifx\rest\empty | |
2757 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. | |
2758 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. | |
2759 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and | |
2760 % not equal to itself. | |
2761 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. | |
2762 % | |
2763 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from | |
2764 % continuing to look for a <number>. | |
2765 % | |
2766 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax | |
2767 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) | |
2768 \else | |
2769 % It's a letter. | |
2770 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax | |
2771 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter | |
2772 \else | |
2773 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter | |
2774 \fi | |
2775 \fi | |
2776 \else | |
2777 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. | |
2778 \numericenumerate | |
2779 \fi | |
2780 } | |
2781 | |
2782 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is | |
2783 % given in \thearg. | |
2784 % | |
2785 \def\numericenumerate{% | |
2786 \itemno = \thearg | |
2787 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% | |
2788 } | |
2789 | |
2790 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. | |
2791 \def\lowercaseenumerate{% | |
2792 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | |
2793 \startenumeration{% | |
2794 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | |
2795 \ifnum\itemno=0 | |
2796 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | |
2797 alphabet}% | |
2798 \fi | |
2799 \char\lccode\itemno | |
2800 }% | |
2801 } | |
2802 | |
2803 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. | |
2804 \def\uppercaseenumerate{% | |
2805 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | |
2806 \startenumeration{% | |
2807 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | |
2808 \ifnum\itemno=0 | |
2809 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | |
2810 alphabet} | |
2811 \fi | |
2812 \char\uccode\itemno | |
2813 }% | |
2814 } | |
2815 | |
69769 | 2816 % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the |
37713 | 2817 % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in |
2818 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. | |
2819 % | |
2820 \def\startenumeration#1{% | |
2821 \advance\itemno by -1 | |
69769 | 2822 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr |
37713 | 2823 } |
2824 | |
2825 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg | |
2826 % to @enumerate. | |
2827 % | |
2828 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} | |
2829 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} | |
2830 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} | |
2831 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} | |
2832 | |
2833 | |
2834 % @multitable macros | |
2835 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 | |
2836 % | |
2837 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. | |
2838 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width | |
2839 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, | |
2840 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. | |
2841 | |
2842 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. | |
2843 | |
2844 % To make preamble: | |
2845 % | |
2846 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: | |
2847 % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 | |
2848 % @item ... | |
2849 % | |
2850 % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total | |
2851 % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many | |
2852 % columns as desired. | |
2853 | |
2854 | |
2855 % Or use a template: | |
2856 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | |
2857 % @item ... | |
2858 % using the widest term desired in each column. | |
2859 | |
2860 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column | |
2861 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's | |
2862 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, | |
2863 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. | |
2864 | |
69769 | 2865 % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt |
2866 % if they are. | |
37713 | 2867 |
2868 % Sample multitable: | |
2869 | |
2870 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | |
2871 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col | |
2872 % @item | |
2873 % first col stuff | |
2874 % @tab | |
2875 % second col stuff | |
2876 % @tab | |
2877 % third col | |
2878 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff | |
2879 % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. | |
2880 % | |
2881 % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. | |
2882 % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. | |
2883 % @end multitable | |
2884 | |
2885 % Default dimensions may be reset by user. | |
2886 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. | |
2887 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. | |
2888 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. | |
2889 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline | |
2890 % to baseline. | |
2891 % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. | |
2892 % | |
2893 \newskip\multitableparskip | |
2894 \newskip\multitableparindent | |
2895 \newdimen\multitablecolspace | |
2896 \newskip\multitablelinespace | |
2897 \multitableparskip=0pt | |
2898 \multitableparindent=6pt | |
2899 \multitablecolspace=12pt | |
2900 \multitablelinespace=0pt | |
2901 | |
2902 % Macros used to set up halign preamble: | |
2903 % | |
2904 \let\endsetuptable\relax | |
2905 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} | |
2906 \let\columnfractions\relax | |
2907 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} | |
2908 \newif\ifsetpercent | |
2909 | |
69769 | 2910 % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might |
2911 % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. | |
2912 % | |
2913 \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% | |
37713 | 2914 \global\advance\colcount by 1 |
69769 | 2915 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% |
37713 | 2916 \setuptable |
2917 } | |
2918 | |
2919 \newcount\colcount | |
2920 \def\setuptable#1{% | |
2921 \def\firstarg{#1}% | |
2922 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable | |
2923 \let\go = \relax | |
2924 \else | |
2925 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions | |
2926 \global\setpercenttrue | |
2927 \else | |
2928 \ifsetpercent | |
2929 \let\go\pickupwholefraction | |
2930 \else | |
2931 \global\advance\colcount by 1 | |
69769 | 2932 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a |
2933 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. | |
37713 | 2934 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% |
2935 \fi | |
2936 \fi | |
2937 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction | |
2938 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so | |
2939 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. | |
2940 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% | |
2941 \else | |
2942 \let\go = \setuptable | |
2943 \fi% | |
2944 \fi | |
2945 \go | |
2946 } | |
2947 | |
69769 | 2948 % multitable-only commands. |
2949 % | |
2950 % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. | |
2951 % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group | |
2952 % of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab. | |
2953 \def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% | |
2954 % | |
2955 % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template | |
2956 % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until | |
2957 % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. | |
2958 % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. | |
2959 \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% | |
37713 | 2960 |
2961 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: | |
2962 % | |
69769 | 2963 \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. |
2964 % | |
2965 \envdef\multitable{% | |
37713 | 2966 \vskip\parskip |
69769 | 2967 \startsavinginserts |
2968 % | |
2969 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. | |
2970 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries | |
2971 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka | |
2972 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. | |
2973 \def\item{\crcr}% | |
2974 % | |
37713 | 2975 \tolerance=9500 |
2976 \hbadness=9500 | |
2977 \setmultitablespacing | |
2978 \parskip=\multitableparskip | |
2979 \parindent=\multitableparindent | |
2980 \overfullrule=0pt | |
2981 \global\colcount=0 | |
69769 | 2982 % |
2983 \everycr = {% | |
2984 \noalign{% | |
2985 \global\everytab={}% | |
2986 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. | |
2987 % Check for saved footnotes, etc. | |
2988 \checkinserts | |
2989 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. | |
2990 %\filbreak | |
2991 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the | |
2992 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the | |
2993 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. | |
2994 }% | |
2995 }% | |
2996 % | |
2997 \parsearg\domultitable | |
2998 } | |
2999 \def\domultitable#1{% | |
37713 | 3000 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: |
3001 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable | |
3002 % | |
3003 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will | |
3004 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. | |
3005 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and | |
3006 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. | |
69769 | 3007 \halign\bgroup &% |
3008 \global\advance\colcount by 1 | |
3009 \multistrut | |
3010 \vtop{% | |
3011 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: | |
3012 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname | |
3013 % | |
3014 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other | |
3015 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after | |
3016 % the first one. | |
3017 % | |
3018 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace | |
3019 % to the width of each template entry. | |
3020 % | |
3021 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will | |
3022 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip | |
3023 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at | |
3024 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. | |
3025 % | |
3026 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. | |
3027 \rightskip=0pt | |
3028 \ifnum\colcount=1 | |
3029 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. | |
3030 \advance\hsize by\leftskip | |
3031 \else | |
3032 \ifsetpercent \else | |
3033 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize | |
3034 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. | |
3035 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace | |
3036 \fi | |
3037 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: | |
3038 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace | |
3039 \fi | |
3040 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious | |
3041 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the | |
3042 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. | |
3043 % For example: | |
3044 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 | |
3045 % @item @code{#} | |
3046 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. | |
3047 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively | |
3048 % marking characters. | |
3049 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut | |
3050 }\cr | |
3051 } | |
3052 \def\Emultitable{% | |
3053 \crcr | |
3054 \egroup % end the \halign | |
3055 \global\setpercentfalse | |
3056 } | |
3057 | |
3058 \def\setmultitablespacing{% | |
3059 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing | |
3060 % | |
3061 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in | |
3062 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on | |
3063 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. | |
3064 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. | |
37713 | 3065 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt |
3066 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip | |
3067 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 | |
69769 | 3068 \fi |
37713 | 3069 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of |
3070 %% table. If not, do nothing. | |
3071 %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. | |
3072 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace | |
3073 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | |
3074 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | |
3075 %% than skip between lines in the table. | |
3076 \fi% | |
3077 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt | |
3078 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | |
3079 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | |
3080 %% than skip between lines in the table. | |
3081 \fi} | |
3082 | |
3083 | |
3084 \message{conditionals,} | |
69769 | 3085 |
3086 % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, | |
3087 % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't | |
3088 % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we | |
3089 % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't | |
3090 % attempt to close an environment group. | |
3091 % | |
3092 \def\makecond#1{% | |
3093 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax | |
3094 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 | |
3095 } | |
3096 \makecond{iftex} | |
3097 \makecond{ifnotdocbook} | |
3098 \makecond{ifnothtml} | |
3099 \makecond{ifnotinfo} | |
3100 \makecond{ifnotplaintext} | |
3101 \makecond{ifnotxml} | |
3102 | |
3103 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. | |
3104 % | |
3105 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} | |
3106 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} | |
3107 \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} | |
3108 \def\html{\doignore{html}} | |
3109 \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} | |
47284 | 3110 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} |
37713 | 3111 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} |
69769 | 3112 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} |
47284 | 3113 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} |
69769 | 3114 \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} |
3115 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} | |
37713 | 3116 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} |
69769 | 3117 \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} |
3118 | |
3119 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. | |
3120 % | |
3121 % A count to remember the depth of nesting. | |
3122 \newcount\doignorecount | |
3123 | |
37713 | 3124 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup |
69769 | 3125 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: |
3126 \obeylines | |
3127 \catcode`\@ = \other | |
3128 \catcode`\{ = \other | |
3129 \catcode`\} = \other | |
37713 | 3130 % |
3131 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. | |
69769 | 3132 \spaceisspace |
3133 % | |
3134 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. | |
3135 \doignorecount = 0 | |
3136 % | |
3137 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. | |
3138 \dodoignore{#1}% | |
3139 } | |
3140 | |
3141 { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. | |
3142 \obeylines % | |
3143 % | |
3144 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% | |
3145 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. | |
3146 % | |
3147 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. | |
3148 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% | |
3149 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% | |
3150 % | |
3151 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a | |
3152 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for | |
3153 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) | |
3154 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% | |
3155 % | |
3156 % And now expand that command. | |
3157 \doignoretext ^^M% | |
3158 }% | |
3159 } | |
3160 | |
3161 \def\doignoreyyy#1{% | |
3162 \def\temp{#1}% | |
3163 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. | |
3164 \let\next\doignoretextzzz | |
3165 \else % Found a nested condition, ... | |
3166 \advance\doignorecount by 1 | |
3167 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. | |
3168 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). | |
47284 | 3169 \fi |
69769 | 3170 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. |
3171 } | |
3172 | |
3173 % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". | |
3174 % | |
3175 \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% | |
3176 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. | |
3177 \let\next\enddoignore | |
3178 \else % Still inside a nested condition. | |
3179 \advance\doignorecount by -1 | |
3180 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. | |
3181 \fi | |
3182 \next | |
3183 } | |
3184 | |
3185 % Finish off ignored text. | |
3186 { \obeylines% | |
3187 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim | |
3188 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional | |
3189 % would result in a blank line in the output. | |
3190 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% | |
3191 } | |
3192 | |
37713 | 3193 |
3194 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. | |
3195 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. | |
3196 % | |
3197 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be | |
3198 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our | |
3199 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we | |
69769 | 3200 % didn't need it. |
3201 % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. | |
3202 % | |
3203 \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} | |
37713 | 3204 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% |
69769 | 3205 {% |
3206 \makevalueexpandable | |
3207 \def\temp{#2}% | |
3208 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% | |
3209 \ifx\temp\empty | |
3210 \next{}% | |
3211 \else | |
3212 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz | |
3213 \fi | |
3214 }% | |
3215 } | |
3216 % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. | |
3217 \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} | |
37713 | 3218 |
3219 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. | |
3220 % | |
69769 | 3221 \parseargdef\clear{% |
3222 {% | |
3223 \makevalueexpandable | |
3224 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax | |
3225 }% | |
3226 } | |
37713 | 3227 |
3228 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. | |
69769 | 3229 \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} |
3230 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} | |
37713 | 3231 { |
69769 | 3232 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active |
3233 % | |
3234 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% | |
3235 \let\value = \expandablevalue | |
3236 % We don't want these characters active, ... | |
3237 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other | |
3238 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if | |
3239 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. | |
3240 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. | |
3241 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore | |
3242 } | |
3243 } | |
37713 | 3244 |
3245 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's | |
69769 | 3246 % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). |
3247 % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since | |
3248 % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the | |
3249 % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain | |
3250 % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work | |
3251 % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). | |
37713 | 3252 % |
3253 \def\expandablevalue#1{% | |
3254 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax | |
3255 {[No value for ``#1'']}% | |
69769 | 3256 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% |
37713 | 3257 \else |
3258 \csname SET#1\endcsname | |
3259 \fi | |
3260 } | |
3261 | |
3262 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined | |
3263 % with @set. | |
3264 % | |
69769 | 3265 % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. |
3266 % | |
3267 \makecond{ifset} | |
3268 \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} | |
3269 \def\doifset#1#2{% | |
3270 {% | |
3271 \makevalueexpandable | |
3272 \let\next=\empty | |
3273 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax | |
3274 #1% If not set, redefine \next. | |
3275 \fi | |
3276 \expandafter | |
3277 }\next | |
3278 } | |
3279 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} | |
37713 | 3280 |
3281 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been | |
3282 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. | |
3283 % | |
69769 | 3284 % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the |
3285 % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, | |
3286 % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. | |
3287 % | |
3288 \makecond{ifclear} | |
3289 \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} | |
3290 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} | |
3291 | |
3292 % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file | |
3293 % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. | |
3294 \let\dircategory=\comment | |
37713 | 3295 |
3296 % @defininfoenclose. | |
3297 \let\definfoenclose=\comment | |
3298 | |
3299 | |
3300 \message{indexing,} | |
3301 % Index generation facilities | |
3302 | |
3303 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite | |
69769 | 3304 % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. |
3305 \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} | |
37713 | 3306 |
3307 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. | |
3308 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that | |
3309 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. | |
3310 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for | |
3311 % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. | |
3312 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long | |
3313 % for the sake of vms. | |
3314 % | |
3315 \def\newindex#1{% | |
3316 \iflinks | |
3317 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | |
3318 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file | |
3319 \fi | |
3320 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index | |
3321 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} | |
3322 } | |
3323 | |
3324 % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} | |
3325 % | |
3326 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} | |
3327 | |
3328 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. | |
3329 % | |
3330 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} | |
3331 % | |
3332 \def\newcodeindex#1{% | |
3333 \iflinks | |
3334 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | |
3335 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 | |
3336 \fi | |
3337 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% | |
3338 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% | |
3339 } | |
3340 | |
3341 | |
3342 % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. | |
3343 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
3344 % |
37713 | 3345 % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo |
3346 % inside @code. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
3347 % |
37713 | 3348 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} |
3349 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} | |
3350 | |
3351 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), | |
3352 % #3 the target index (bar). | |
3353 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% | |
3354 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up | |
3355 % closing the target index. | |
3356 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined | |
3357 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the | |
3358 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. | |
3359 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname | |
3360 \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 | |
3361 \fi | |
3362 % redefine \fooindfile: | |
3363 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname | |
3364 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp | |
3365 % redefine \fooindex: | |
3366 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% | |
3367 } | |
3368 | |
3369 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. | |
3370 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, | |
3371 % and it is "foo", the name of the index. | |
3372 | |
3373 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. | |
3374 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. | |
3375 | |
3376 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} | |
3377 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. | |
3378 | |
3379 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} | |
3380 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} | |
3381 | |
3382 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. | |
3383 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} | |
3384 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} | |
3385 | |
69769 | 3386 % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. |
3387 % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, | |
3388 % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
3389 % |
37713 | 3390 \def\indexdummies{% |
69769 | 3391 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. |
3392 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. | |
3393 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% | |
3394 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. | |
3395 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes | |
3396 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. | |
3397 \let\{ = \mylbrace | |
3398 \let\} = \myrbrace | |
3399 % | |
3400 % Do the redefinitions. | |
3401 \commondummies | |
3402 } | |
3403 | |
3404 % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to | |
3405 % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of | |
3406 % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, | |
3407 % this will be simpler. | |
3408 % | |
3409 \def\atdummies{% | |
3410 \def\@{@@}% | |
3411 \def\ {@ }% | |
3412 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd | |
3413 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd | |
3414 % | |
3415 % Do the redefinitions. | |
3416 \commondummies | |
3417 \otherbackslash | |
3418 } | |
3419 | |
3420 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. | |
3421 % | |
3422 \def\commondummies{% | |
3423 % | |
3424 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively | |
3425 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words, | |
3426 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for | |
3427 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word | |
3428 % from whatever follows. | |
3429 % | |
3430 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the | |
3431 % space. | |
3432 % | |
3433 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and | |
3434 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then | |
3435 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). | |
3436 % | |
3437 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% | |
3438 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% | |
3439 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter | |
3440 % | |
3441 \commondummiesnofonts | |
3442 % | |
3443 \definedummyletter\_% | |
3444 % | |
3445 % Non-English letters. | |
3446 \definedummyword\AA | |
3447 \definedummyword\AE | |
3448 \definedummyword\L | |
3449 \definedummyword\OE | |
3450 \definedummyword\O | |
3451 \definedummyword\aa | |
3452 \definedummyword\ae | |
3453 \definedummyword\l | |
3454 \definedummyword\oe | |
3455 \definedummyword\o | |
3456 \definedummyword\ss | |
3457 \definedummyword\exclamdown | |
3458 \definedummyword\questiondown | |
3459 \definedummyword\ordf | |
3460 \definedummyword\ordm | |
3461 % | |
3462 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. | |
3463 \definedummyword\bf | |
3464 \definedummyword\gtr | |
3465 \definedummyword\hat | |
3466 \definedummyword\less | |
3467 \definedummyword\sf | |
3468 \definedummyword\sl | |
3469 \definedummyword\tclose | |
3470 \definedummyword\tt | |
3471 % | |
3472 \definedummyword\LaTeX | |
3473 \definedummyword\TeX | |
3474 % | |
3475 % Assorted special characters. | |
3476 \definedummyword\bullet | |
3477 \definedummyword\comma | |
3478 \definedummyword\copyright | |
3479 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol | |
3480 \definedummyword\dots | |
3481 \definedummyword\enddots | |
3482 \definedummyword\equiv | |
3483 \definedummyword\error | |
3484 \definedummyword\euro | |
3485 \definedummyword\expansion | |
3486 \definedummyword\minus | |
3487 \definedummyword\pounds | |
3488 \definedummyword\point | |
3489 \definedummyword\print | |
3490 \definedummyword\result | |
3491 % | |
3492 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. | |
3493 \macrolist | |
3494 % | |
3495 \normalturnoffactive | |
3496 % | |
3497 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any | |
3498 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. | |
3499 \makevalueexpandable | |
3500 } | |
3501 | |
3502 % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. | |
3503 % | |
3504 \def\commondummiesnofonts{% | |
3505 % Control letters and accents. | |
3506 \definedummyletter\!% | |
3507 \definedummyaccent\"% | |
3508 \definedummyaccent\'% | |
3509 \definedummyletter\*% | |
3510 \definedummyaccent\,% | |
3511 \definedummyletter\.% | |
3512 \definedummyletter\/% | |
3513 \definedummyletter\:% | |
3514 \definedummyaccent\=% | |
3515 \definedummyletter\?% | |
3516 \definedummyaccent\^% | |
3517 \definedummyaccent\`% | |
3518 \definedummyaccent\~% | |
3519 \definedummyword\u | |
3520 \definedummyword\v | |
3521 \definedummyword\H | |
3522 \definedummyword\dotaccent | |
3523 \definedummyword\ringaccent | |
3524 \definedummyword\tieaccent | |
3525 \definedummyword\ubaraccent | |
3526 \definedummyword\udotaccent | |
3527 \definedummyword\dotless | |
3528 % | |
3529 % Texinfo font commands. | |
3530 \definedummyword\b | |
3531 \definedummyword\i | |
3532 \definedummyword\r | |
3533 \definedummyword\sc | |
3534 \definedummyword\t | |
3535 % | |
3536 % Commands that take arguments. | |
3537 \definedummyword\acronym | |
3538 \definedummyword\cite | |
3539 \definedummyword\code | |
3540 \definedummyword\command | |
3541 \definedummyword\dfn | |
3542 \definedummyword\emph | |
3543 \definedummyword\env | |
3544 \definedummyword\file | |
3545 \definedummyword\kbd | |
3546 \definedummyword\key | |
3547 \definedummyword\math | |
3548 \definedummyword\option | |
3549 \definedummyword\pxref | |
3550 \definedummyword\ref | |
3551 \definedummyword\samp | |
3552 \definedummyword\strong | |
3553 \definedummyword\tie | |
3554 \definedummyword\uref | |
3555 \definedummyword\url | |
3556 \definedummyword\var | |
3557 \definedummyword\verb | |
3558 \definedummyword\w | |
3559 \definedummyword\xref | |
3560 } | |
3561 | |
3562 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index | |
3563 % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all | |
3564 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string | |
3565 % would be for a given command (usually its argument). | |
3566 % | |
37713 | 3567 \def\indexnofonts{% |
69769 | 3568 % Accent commands should become @asis. |
3569 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% | |
3570 % We can just ignore other control letters. | |
3571 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% | |
3572 % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. | |
3573 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent | |
3574 % | |
3575 \commondummiesnofonts | |
3576 % | |
3577 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command | |
3578 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. | |
3579 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. | |
3580 %\let\tt=\asis | |
3581 % | |
3582 \def\ { }% | |
3583 \def\@{@}% | |
3584 % how to handle braces? | |
3585 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% | |
3586 % | |
3587 % Non-English letters. | |
3588 \def\AA{AA}% | |
3589 \def\AE{AE}% | |
3590 \def\L{L}% | |
3591 \def\OE{OE}% | |
3592 \def\O{O}% | |
3593 \def\aa{aa}% | |
3594 \def\ae{ae}% | |
3595 \def\l{l}% | |
3596 \def\oe{oe}% | |
3597 \def\o{o}% | |
3598 \def\ss{ss}% | |
3599 \def\exclamdown{!}% | |
3600 \def\questiondown{?}% | |
3601 \def\ordf{a}% | |
3602 \def\ordm{o}% | |
3603 % | |
3604 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% | |
3605 \def\TeX{TeX}% | |
3606 % | |
3607 % Assorted special characters. | |
3608 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) | |
3609 \def\bullet{bullet}% | |
3610 \def\comma{,}% | |
3611 \def\copyright{copyright}% | |
3612 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% | |
3613 \def\dots{...}% | |
3614 \def\enddots{...}% | |
3615 \def\equiv{==}% | |
3616 \def\error{error}% | |
3617 \def\euro{euro}% | |
3618 \def\expansion{==>}% | |
3619 \def\minus{-}% | |
3620 \def\pounds{pounds}% | |
3621 \def\point{.}% | |
3622 \def\print{-|}% | |
3623 \def\result{=>}% | |
3624 % | |
3625 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). | |
3626 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. | |
3627 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up | |
3628 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry | |
3629 % that starts with \. | |
3630 % | |
3631 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them | |
3632 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that | |
3633 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. | |
3634 % | |
3635 \macrolist | |
3636 } | |
37713 | 3637 |
3638 \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. | |
3639 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? | |
3640 | |
3641 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. | |
69769 | 3642 % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. |
3643 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} | |
37713 | 3644 |
3645 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. | |
3646 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- | |
69769 | 3647 % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception |
3648 % is with most defuns, which call us directly). | |
37713 | 3649 % |
3650 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% | |
69769 | 3651 \iflinks |
3652 {% | |
3653 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). | |
3654 \toks0 = {#2}% | |
3655 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. | |
3656 \def\thirdarg{#3}% | |
3657 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else | |
3658 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% | |
3659 \fi | |
3660 % | |
3661 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% | |
3662 % | |
3663 \ifvmode | |
3664 \dosubindsanitize | |
3665 \else | |
3666 \dosubindwrite | |
3667 \fi | |
3668 }% | |
3669 \fi | |
3670 } | |
3671 | |
3672 % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: | |
3673 % | |
3674 \def\dosubindwrite{% | |
37713 | 3675 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. |
3676 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else | |
69769 | 3677 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% |
37713 | 3678 \fi |
69769 | 3679 % |
3680 % Remember, we are within a group. | |
3681 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage | |
3682 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now | |
3683 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. | |
3684 % | |
3685 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to | |
3686 % get the string to sort by. | |
3687 {\indexnofonts | |
3688 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion | |
3689 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% | |
3690 }% | |
3691 % | |
3692 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and | |
3693 % the original text, including any font commands. We write | |
3694 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the | |
3695 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s | |
3696 % sorted result. | |
3697 \edef\temp{% | |
3698 \write\writeto{% | |
3699 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% | |
37713 | 3700 }% |
69769 | 3701 \temp |
3702 } | |
3703 | |
3704 % Take care of unwanted page breaks: | |
3705 % | |
3706 % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it | |
3707 % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting | |
3708 % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the | |
3709 % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences | |
3710 % like this: | |
3711 % @end defun | |
3712 % @tindex whatever | |
3713 % @defun ... | |
3714 % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the | |
3715 % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of | |
3716 % the previous defun. | |
3717 % | |
3718 % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We | |
3719 % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. | |
3720 % | |
3721 % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. | |
3722 % | |
3723 % But wait, there is a catch there: | |
3724 % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not | |
3725 % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts | |
3726 % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual | |
3727 % representation of the skip. | |
3728 % | |
3729 % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that | |
3730 % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). | |
3731 % | |
3732 \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} | |
3733 % | |
3734 % ..., ready, GO: | |
3735 % | |
3736 \def\dosubindsanitize{% | |
3737 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. | |
3738 \skip0 = \lastskip | |
3739 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% | |
3740 \count255 = \lastpenalty | |
3741 % | |
3742 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a | |
3743 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this | |
3744 % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a | |
3745 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential | |
3746 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. | |
3747 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | |
3748 \else | |
3749 \vskip-\skip0 | |
3750 \fi | |
3751 % | |
3752 \dosubindwrite | |
3753 % | |
3754 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | |
3755 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and | |
3756 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want | |
3757 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various | |
3758 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any | |
3759 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: | |
3760 % | |
3761 % @deffn deffn-whatever | |
3762 % @vindex index-whatever | |
3763 % Description. | |
3764 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit | |
3765 % and the "Description." paragraph. | |
3766 \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi | |
3767 \else | |
3768 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, | |
3769 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item | |
3770 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. | |
3771 \nobreak\vskip\skip0 | |
3772 \fi | |
37713 | 3773 } |
3774 | |
3775 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like | |
3776 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} | |
3777 % or | |
3778 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} | |
3779 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files | |
3780 % containing these kinds of lines: | |
3781 % \initial {c} | |
3782 % before the first topic whose initial is c | |
3783 % \entry {topic}{pagelist} | |
3784 % for a topic that is used without subtopics | |
3785 % \primary {topic} | |
3786 % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics | |
3787 % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} | |
3788 % for each subtopic. | |
3789 | |
3790 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands | |
3791 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. | |
3792 | |
3793 \def\findex {\fnindex} | |
3794 \def\kindex {\kyindex} | |
3795 \def\cindex {\cpindex} | |
3796 \def\vindex {\vrindex} | |
3797 \def\tindex {\tpindex} | |
3798 \def\pindex {\pgindex} | |
3799 | |
3800 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} | |
3801 {\obeylines % | |
3802 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % | |
3803 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} | |
3804 | |
3805 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. | |
3806 | |
3807 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. | |
3808 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). | |
3809 % | |
69769 | 3810 \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup |
37713 | 3811 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% |
3812 % | |
3813 \smallfonts \rm | |
3814 \tolerance = 9500 | |
69769 | 3815 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. |
37713 | 3816 % |
3817 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. | |
3818 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains | |
3819 % \initial {@} | |
3820 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces | |
3821 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). | |
3822 \catcode`\@ = 11 | |
3823 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s | |
3824 \ifeof 1 | |
3825 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, | |
3826 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the | |
3827 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure | |
3828 % there is some text. | |
3829 \putwordIndexNonexistent | |
3830 \else | |
3831 % | |
3832 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof | |
3833 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so | |
3834 % it can discover if there is anything in it. | |
3835 \read 1 to \temp | |
3836 \ifeof 1 | |
3837 \putwordIndexIsEmpty | |
3838 \else | |
3839 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape | |
3840 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change | |
3841 % to make right now. | |
69769 | 3842 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% |
37713 | 3843 \catcode`\\ = 0 |
3844 \escapechar = `\\ | |
3845 \begindoublecolumns | |
3846 \input \jobname.#1s | |
3847 \enddoublecolumns | |
3848 \fi | |
3849 \fi | |
3850 \closein 1 | |
3851 \endgroup} | |
3852 | |
3853 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. | |
3854 % Change them to control the appearance of the index. | |
3855 | |
3856 \def\initial#1{{% | |
3857 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. | |
3858 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt | |
3859 % | |
3860 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. | |
3861 \removelastskip | |
3862 % | |
3863 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. | |
69769 | 3864 \nobreak |
3865 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip | |
3866 \penalty 0 | |
3867 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip | |
37713 | 3868 % |
3869 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of | |
3870 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column | |
3871 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch | |
3872 % we need before each entry, but it's better. | |
3873 % | |
3874 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. | |
3875 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip | |
3876 \leftline{\secbf #1}% | |
3877 % Do our best not to break after the initial. | |
3878 \nobreak | |
69769 | 3879 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip |
37713 | 3880 }} |
3881 | |
69769 | 3882 % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and |
3883 % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index | |
3884 % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. | |
3885 % | |
3886 % A straightforward implementation would start like this: | |
3887 % \def\entry#1#2{... | |
3888 % But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to | |
3889 % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- | |
3890 % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. | |
3891 % | |
3892 % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. | |
3893 % --kasal, 21nov03 | |
3894 \def\entry{% | |
3895 \begingroup | |
3896 % | |
3897 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't | |
3898 % affect previous text. | |
3899 \par | |
3900 % | |
3901 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. | |
3902 \parfillskip = 0in | |
3903 % | |
3904 % No extra space above this paragraph. | |
3905 \parskip = 0in | |
3906 % | |
3907 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. | |
3908 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 | |
3909 % | |
3910 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number | |
3911 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the | |
3912 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large | |
3913 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across | |
3914 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. | |
3915 % | |
3916 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start | |
3917 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. | |
3918 \hangindent = 2em | |
3919 % | |
3920 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line | |
3921 % with blank space. | |
3922 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil | |
37713 | 3923 % |
69769 | 3924 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing |
3925 % columns. | |
3926 \vskip 0pt plus1pt | |
3927 % | |
3928 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): | |
3929 \afterassignment\doentry | |
3930 \let\temp = | |
3931 } | |
3932 \def\doentry{% | |
3933 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. | |
3934 \noindent | |
3935 \aftergroup\finishentry | |
3936 % And now comes the text of the entry. | |
3937 } | |
3938 \def\finishentry#1{% | |
3939 % #1 is the page number. | |
37713 | 3940 % |
69769 | 3941 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if |
3942 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be | |
3943 % cursed by a Unix daemon. | |
3944 \def\tempa{{\rm }}% | |
3945 \def\tempb{#1}% | |
3946 \edef\tempc{\tempa}% | |
3947 \edef\tempd{\tempb}% | |
3948 \ifx\tempc\tempd | |
3949 \ % | |
37713 | 3950 \else |
69769 | 3951 % |
3952 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out | |
3953 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the | |
3954 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) | |
3955 \hfil\penalty50 | |
3956 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. | |
3957 % | |
3958 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as | |
3959 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull | |
3960 % \hbox ensues. | |
3961 \ifpdf | |
3962 \pdfgettoks#1.% | |
3963 \ \the\toksA | |
3964 \else | |
3965 \ #1% | |
3966 \fi | |
37713 | 3967 \fi |
69769 | 3968 \par |
3969 \endgroup | |
3970 } | |
37713 | 3971 |
3972 % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em. | |
3973 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders | |
3974 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} | |
3975 | |
3976 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} | |
3977 | |
3978 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm | |
3979 \def\secondary#1#2{{% | |
3980 \parfillskip=0in | |
3981 \parskip=0in | |
3982 \hangindent=1in | |
3983 \hangafter=1 | |
3984 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill | |
3985 \ifpdf | |
3986 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. | |
3987 \else | |
3988 #2 | |
3989 \fi | |
3990 \par | |
3991 }} | |
3992 | |
3993 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. | |
3994 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, | |
3995 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. | |
3996 \catcode`\@=11 | |
3997 | |
3998 \newbox\partialpage | |
3999 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize | |
4000 | |
4001 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns | |
4002 % Grab any single-column material above us. | |
4003 \output = {% | |
4004 % | |
4005 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a | |
4006 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output | |
4007 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is | |
4008 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In | |
4009 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal | |
4010 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this | |
4011 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. | |
4012 \ifvoid\partialpage \else | |
4013 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% | |
4014 \fi | |
4015 % | |
4016 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% | |
4017 % Unvbox the main output page. | |
4018 \unvbox\PAGE | |
4019 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip | |
4020 }% | |
4021 }% | |
4022 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage | |
4023 % | |
4024 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. | |
4025 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% | |
4026 % | |
4027 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this | |
4028 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 | |
4029 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple | |
4030 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the | |
4031 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. | |
4032 % | |
4033 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between | |
4034 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it | |
4035 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant | |
4036 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) | |
4037 % as it did when we hard-coded it. | |
4038 % | |
4039 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we | |
4040 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) | |
4041 % been clobbered. | |
4042 % | |
4043 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize | |
4044 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize | |
4045 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 | |
4046 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | |
4047 % | |
4048 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, | |
4049 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) | |
4050 \vsize = 2\vsize | |
4051 } | |
4052 | |
4053 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except | |
4054 % the last. | |
4055 % | |
4056 \def\doublecolumnout{% | |
4057 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth | |
4058 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal | |
4059 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the | |
4060 % previous page. | |
4061 \dimen@ = \vsize | |
4062 \divide\dimen@ by 2 | |
4063 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage | |
4064 % | |
4065 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. | |
4066 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ | |
4067 \onepageout\pagesofar | |
4068 \unvbox255 | |
4069 \penalty\outputpenalty | |
4070 } | |
4071 % | |
4072 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, | |
4073 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. | |
4074 \def\pagesofar{% | |
4075 \unvbox\partialpage | |
4076 % | |
4077 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | |
4078 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize | |
4079 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% | |
4080 } | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
4081 % |
37713 | 4082 % All done with double columns. |
4083 \def\enddoublecolumns{% | |
4084 \output = {% | |
4085 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the | |
4086 % current page, no automatic page break. | |
4087 \balancecolumns | |
4088 % | |
4089 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, | |
4090 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output | |
4091 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not | |
4092 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal | |
4093 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be | |
4094 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes | |
4095 % the output somewhat more palatable.) | |
4096 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% | |
4097 }% | |
4098 \eject | |
4099 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns | |
4100 % | |
4101 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted | |
4102 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column | |
4103 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the | |
4104 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). | |
4105 \pagegoal = \vsize | |
4106 } | |
4107 % | |
4108 % Called at the end of the double column material. | |
4109 \def\balancecolumns{% | |
4110 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. | |
4111 \dimen@ = \ht0 | |
4112 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip | |
4113 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip | |
4114 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to | |
4115 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% | |
4116 \splittopskip = \topskip | |
4117 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. | |
4118 {% | |
4119 \vbadness = 10000 | |
4120 \loop | |
4121 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 | |
4122 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ | |
4123 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ | |
4124 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt | |
4125 \repeat | |
4126 }% | |
4127 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% | |
4128 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% | |
4129 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% | |
4130 % | |
4131 \pagesofar | |
4132 } | |
4133 \catcode`\@ = \other | |
4134 | |
4135 | |
4136 \message{sectioning,} | |
4137 % Chapters, sections, etc. | |
4138 | |
69769 | 4139 % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered |
4140 % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf | |
4141 % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter | |
4142 % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 | |
4143 % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) | |
4144 \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 | |
37713 | 4145 \newcount\chapno |
4146 \newcount\secno \secno=0 | |
4147 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 | |
4148 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 | |
4149 | |
4150 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... | |
4151 \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ | |
69769 | 4152 % |
37713 | 4153 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} |
69769 | 4154 % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple |
4155 % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual | |
37713 | 4156 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. |
69769 | 4157 % |
37713 | 4158 \def\appendixletter{% |
4159 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% | |
4160 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% | |
4161 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% | |
4162 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% | |
4163 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% | |
4164 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% | |
4165 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% | |
4166 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% | |
4167 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% | |
4168 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% | |
4169 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% | |
4170 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% | |
4171 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% | |
4172 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% | |
4173 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% | |
4174 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% | |
4175 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% | |
4176 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% | |
4177 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% | |
4178 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% | |
4179 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% | |
4180 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% | |
4181 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% | |
4182 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% | |
4183 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% | |
4184 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% | |
4185 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is | |
4186 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not | |
4187 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out | |
4188 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. | |
4189 \else\char\the\appendixno | |
4190 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | |
4191 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} | |
4192 | |
4193 % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. | |
4194 % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise. | |
69769 | 4195 % However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks. |
37713 | 4196 \def\thischapter{} |
4197 \def\thissection{} | |
4198 | |
4199 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level | |
69769 | 4200 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count |
37713 | 4201 |
4202 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. | |
4203 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} | |
4204 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name | |
4205 | |
4206 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. | |
4207 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} | |
4208 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name | |
4209 | |
69769 | 4210 % we only have subsub. |
4211 \chardef\maxseclevel = 3 | |
4212 % | |
4213 % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. | |
4214 % To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: | |
4215 \chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel | |
4216 % | |
4217 % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: | |
4218 % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. | |
4219 \def\chapheadtype{N} | |
4220 | |
4221 % Choose a heading macro | |
4222 % #1 is heading type | |
4223 % #2 is heading level | |
4224 % #3 is text for heading | |
4225 \def\genhead#1#2#3{% | |
4226 % Compute the abs. sec. level: | |
4227 \absseclevel=#2 | |
4228 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase | |
4229 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: | |
4230 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 | |
4231 \absseclevel = 0 | |
37713 | 4232 \else |
69769 | 4233 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 |
4234 \absseclevel = 3 | |
4235 \fi | |
37713 | 4236 \fi |
69769 | 4237 % The heading type: |
4238 \def\headtype{#1}% | |
4239 \if \headtype U% | |
4240 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel | |
4241 \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel | |
4242 \fi | |
37713 | 4243 \else |
69769 | 4244 % Check for appendix sections: |
4245 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 | |
4246 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% | |
4247 \else | |
4248 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% | |
4249 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% | |
4250 \fi\fi | |
4251 \fi | |
4252 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: | |
4253 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel | |
4254 \def\headtype{U}% | |
4255 \else | |
4256 \chardef\unmlevel = 3 | |
4257 \fi | |
4258 \fi | |
4259 % Now print the heading: | |
4260 \if \headtype U% | |
4261 \ifcase\absseclevel | |
4262 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% | |
4263 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% | |
4264 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4265 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4266 \fi | |
4267 \else | |
4268 \if \headtype A% | |
4269 \ifcase\absseclevel | |
4270 \appendixzzz{#3}% | |
4271 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% | |
4272 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4273 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4274 \fi | |
4275 \else | |
4276 \ifcase\absseclevel | |
4277 \chapterzzz{#3}% | |
4278 \or \seczzz{#3}% | |
4279 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4280 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4281 \fi | |
4282 \fi | |
37713 | 4283 \fi |
69769 | 4284 \suppressfirstparagraphindent |
4285 } | |
4286 | |
4287 % an interface: | |
4288 \def\numhead{\genhead N} | |
4289 \def\apphead{\genhead A} | |
4290 \def\unnmhead{\genhead U} | |
4291 | |
4292 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset | |
4293 % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. | |
4294 % | |
4295 % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers | |
4296 % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. | |
4297 \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | |
4298 % | |
4299 \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz | |
4300 \def\chapterzzz#1{% | |
4301 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such | |
4302 % as an @include file. | |
4303 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
4304 \global\advance\chapno by 1 | |
4305 % | |
4306 % Used for \float. | |
4307 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% | |
4308 \resetallfloatnos | |
4309 % | |
4310 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% | |
4311 % | |
4312 % Write the actual heading. | |
4313 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% | |
4314 % | |
4315 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. | |
4316 \global\let\section = \numberedsec | |
4317 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | |
4318 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | |
4319 } | |
4320 | |
4321 \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz | |
4322 \def\appendixzzz#1{% | |
4323 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
4324 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 | |
4325 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% | |
4326 \resetallfloatnos | |
4327 % | |
4328 \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% | |
4329 \message{\appendixnum}% | |
4330 % | |
4331 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% | |
4332 % | |
4333 \global\let\section = \appendixsec | |
4334 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec | |
4335 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec | |
4336 } | |
4337 | |
4338 \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz | |
4339 \def\unnumberedzzz#1{% | |
4340 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
4341 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 | |
4342 % | |
4343 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. | |
4344 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | |
4345 \resetallfloatnos | |
4346 % | |
4347 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the | |
4348 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX | |
4349 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX | |
4350 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant | |
4351 % to be executed, not expanded). | |
4352 % | |
4353 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear | |
4354 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use | |
4355 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, | |
4356 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for | |
4357 % the toc entries.) | |
4358 \toks0 = {#1}% | |
4359 \message{(\the\toks0)}% | |
4360 % | |
4361 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% | |
4362 % | |
4363 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec | |
4364 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec | |
4365 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec | |
37713 | 4366 } |
4367 | |
4368 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. | |
69769 | 4369 \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% |
4370 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break | |
4371 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. | |
4372 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 | |
4373 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters | |
4374 \unnmhead0{#1}% | |
4375 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | |
4376 } | |
37713 | 4377 |
4378 % @top is like @unnumbered. | |
69769 | 4379 \let\top\unnumbered |
37713 | 4380 |
4381 % Sections. | |
69769 | 4382 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz |
4383 \def\seczzz#1{% | |
4384 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
4385 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% | |
4386 } | |
4387 | |
4388 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz | |
4389 \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% | |
4390 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
4391 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% | |
4392 } | |
4393 \let\appendixsec\appendixsection | |
4394 | |
4395 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz | |
4396 \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% | |
4397 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
4398 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% | |
37713 | 4399 } |
4400 | |
4401 % Subsections. | |
69769 | 4402 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz |
4403 \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% | |
4404 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
4405 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
4406 } | |
4407 | |
4408 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz | |
4409 \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% | |
4410 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
4411 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% | |
4412 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
4413 } | |
4414 | |
4415 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz | |
4416 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% | |
4417 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
4418 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% | |
4419 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
37713 | 4420 } |
4421 | |
4422 % Subsubsections. | |
69769 | 4423 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz |
4424 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
4425 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
4426 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% | |
4427 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
4428 } | |
4429 | |
4430 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz | |
4431 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
4432 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
4433 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% | |
4434 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
4435 } | |
4436 | |
4437 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz | |
4438 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
4439 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
4440 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% | |
4441 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
4442 } | |
37713 | 4443 |
4444 % These macros control what the section commands do, according | |
4445 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). | |
4446 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. | |
69769 | 4447 \let\section = \numberedsec |
4448 \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | |
4449 \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | |
37713 | 4450 |
4451 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading | |
4452 | |
4453 % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: | |
4454 % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit | |
4455 % overlong headings to fold. | |
4456 % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a | |
4457 % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. | |
4458 % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and | |
4459 % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. | |
4460 | |
4461 | |
69769 | 4462 \def\majorheading{% |
4463 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% | |
4464 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz | |
4465 } | |
4466 | |
4467 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} | |
4468 \def\chapheadingzzz#1{% | |
4469 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
4470 \parindent=0pt\raggedright | |
4471 \rm #1\hfill}}% | |
4472 \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax | |
4473 \suppressfirstparagraphindent | |
4474 } | |
37713 | 4475 |
4476 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. | |
69769 | 4477 \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} |
4478 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
4479 \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | |
4480 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
4481 \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | |
4482 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
37713 | 4483 |
4484 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only | |
4485 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), | |
4486 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. | |
4487 | |
4488 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) | |
4489 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} | |
4490 | |
4491 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it | |
4492 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) | |
4493 | |
4494 \newskip\chapheadingskip | |
4495 | |
4496 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} | |
4497 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} | |
4498 \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} | |
4499 | |
4500 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} | |
4501 | |
4502 \def\CHAPPAGoff{% | |
4503 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
4504 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak | |
4505 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} | |
4506 | |
4507 \def\CHAPPAGon{% | |
4508 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
4509 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager | |
4510 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager | |
4511 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} | |
4512 | |
69769 | 4513 \def\CHAPPAGodd{% |
37713 | 4514 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage |
4515 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage | |
4516 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage | |
4517 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} | |
4518 | |
4519 \CHAPPAGon | |
4520 | |
69769 | 4521 % Chapter opening. |
4522 % | |
4523 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, | |
4524 % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. | |
4525 % | |
4526 % To test against our argument. | |
4527 \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} | |
4528 \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} | |
4529 \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} | |
4530 % | |
4531 \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% | |
37713 | 4532 \pchapsepmacro |
4533 {% | |
4534 \chapfonts \rm | |
69769 | 4535 % |
4536 % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the | |
4537 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called | |
4538 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. | |
4539 \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
4540 \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% | |
4541 % | |
4542 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix | |
4543 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. | |
4544 \def\temptype{#2}% | |
4545 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword | |
4546 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
4547 \def\toctype{unnchap}% | |
4548 \gdef\thischapter{#1}% | |
4549 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | |
4550 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry | |
4551 \def\toctype{omit}% | |
4552 \gdef\thischapter{}% | |
4553 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | |
4554 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% | |
4555 \def\toctype{app}% | |
4556 % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter | |
4557 % because we don't want its macros evaluated now. And we don't | |
4558 % use \thissection because that changes with each section. | |
4559 % | |
4560 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: | |
4561 \noexpand\thischaptername}% | |
4562 \else | |
4563 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% | |
4564 \def\toctype{numchap}% | |
4565 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: | |
4566 \noexpand\thischaptername}% | |
4567 \fi\fi\fi | |
4568 % | |
4569 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the | |
4570 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc | |
4571 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. | |
4572 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% | |
4573 % | |
4574 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make | |
4575 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has | |
4576 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the | |
4577 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not | |
4578 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. | |
4579 \donoderef{#2}% | |
4580 % | |
4581 % Typeset the actual heading. | |
37713 | 4582 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
69769 | 4583 \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe |
37713 | 4584 \unhbox0 #1\par}% |
4585 }% | |
4586 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title | |
4587 \nobreak | |
4588 } | |
4589 | |
4590 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. | |
4591 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | |
69769 | 4592 \def\centerparameters{% |
4593 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip | |
4594 \leftskip = \rightskip | |
4595 \parfillskip = 0pt | |
4596 } | |
4597 | |
4598 | |
4599 % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not | |
4600 % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. | |
4601 % | |
4602 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} | |
4603 % | |
37713 | 4604 \def\unnchfopen #1{% |
4605 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
4606 \parindent=0pt\raggedright | |
4607 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | |
4608 } | |
4609 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts | |
4610 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% | |
4611 \par\penalty 5000 % | |
4612 } | |
4613 \def\centerchfopen #1{% | |
4614 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
4615 \parindent=0pt | |
4616 \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | |
4617 } | |
69769 | 4618 \def\CHAPFopen{% |
4619 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen | |
4620 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} | |
4621 | |
4622 | |
4623 % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and | |
4624 % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. | |
4625 % | |
37713 | 4626 \newskip\secheadingskip |
69769 | 4627 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} |
37713 | 4628 |
4629 % Subsection titles. | |
69769 | 4630 \newskip\subsecheadingskip |
4631 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} | |
37713 | 4632 |
4633 % Subsubsection titles. | |
69769 | 4634 \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} |
4635 \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} | |
4636 | |
4637 | |
4638 % Print any size, any type, section title. | |
4639 % | |
4640 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is | |
4641 % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the | |
4642 % section number. | |
4643 % | |
4644 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% | |
37713 | 4645 {% |
4646 % Switch to the right set of fonts. | |
69769 | 4647 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm |
4648 % | |
4649 % Insert space above the heading. | |
4650 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname | |
4651 % | |
4652 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. | |
4653 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% | |
4654 \def\temptype{#3}% | |
37713 | 4655 % |
69769 | 4656 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword |
4657 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
4658 \def\toctype{unn}% | |
4659 \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
4660 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | |
4661 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, | |
4662 % and don't redefine \thissection. | |
4663 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
4664 \def\toctype{omit}% | |
4665 \let\sectionlevel=\empty | |
4666 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | |
4667 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | |
4668 \def\toctype{app}% | |
4669 \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
4670 \else | |
4671 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | |
4672 \def\toctype{num}% | |
4673 \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
4674 \fi\fi\fi | |
4675 % | |
4676 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. | |
4677 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% | |
37713 | 4678 % |
69769 | 4679 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). |
4680 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. | |
4681 \donoderef{#3}% | |
4682 % | |
4683 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. | |
4684 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be | |
4685 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the | |
4686 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that | |
4687 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the | |
4688 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. | |
4689 \nobreak | |
4690 % | |
4691 % Output the actual section heading. | |
37713 | 4692 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
69769 | 4693 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number |
4694 \unhbox0 #1}% | |
37713 | 4695 }% |
69769 | 4696 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. |
4697 % Don't allow stretch, though. | |
4698 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname | |
4699 % | |
4700 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it | |
4701 % was followed by glue. | |
4702 \nobreak | |
4703 % | |
4704 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that | |
4705 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a | |
4706 % discardable item.) | |
4707 \vskip-\parskip | |
4708 % | |
4709 % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > | |
4710 % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after | |
4711 % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: | |
4712 % | |
4713 % @section sec-whatever | |
4714 % @deffn def-whatever | |
4715 \penalty 10001 | |
37713 | 4716 } |
4717 | |
4718 | |
4719 \message{toc,} | |
4720 % Table of contents. | |
4721 \newwrite\tocfile | |
4722 | |
4723 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. | |
69769 | 4724 % Called from @chapter, etc. |
4725 % | |
4726 % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} | |
4727 % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional | |
4728 % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually | |
4729 % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the | |
4730 % destination to jump to. | |
4731 % | |
4732 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or | |
4733 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. | |
4734 % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the | |
4735 % table of contents chapter openings themselves. | |
37713 | 4736 % |
4737 \newif\iftocfileopened | |
69769 | 4738 \def\omitkeyword{omit}% |
4739 % | |
4740 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% | |
4741 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% | |
4742 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else | |
4743 \iftocfileopened\else | |
4744 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc | |
4745 \global\tocfileopenedtrue | |
4746 \fi | |
4747 % | |
4748 \iflinks | |
4749 {\atdummies | |
4750 \edef\temp{% | |
4751 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% | |
4752 \temp | |
4753 }% | |
4754 \fi | |
37713 | 4755 \fi |
69769 | 4756 % |
4757 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're | |
4758 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't | |
4759 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered | |
4760 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first | |
4761 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named | |
4762 % `1', and two named `2'. | |
4763 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi | |
4764 } | |
4765 | |
4766 | |
4767 % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman | |
4768 % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant | |
4769 % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. | |
4770 % | |
4771 \def\activecatcodes{% | |
4772 \catcode`\"=\active | |
4773 \catcode`\$=\active | |
4774 \catcode`\<=\active | |
4775 \catcode`\>=\active | |
4776 \catcode`\\=\active | |
4777 \catcode`\^=\active | |
4778 \catcode`\_=\active | |
4779 \catcode`\|=\active | |
4780 \catcode`\~=\active | |
4781 } | |
4782 | |
4783 | |
4784 % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. | |
4785 \def\readtocfile{% | |
4786 \setupdatafile | |
4787 \activecatcodes | |
4788 \input \jobname.toc | |
37713 | 4789 } |
4790 | |
4791 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in | |
4792 \newcount\savepageno | |
4793 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 | |
4794 | |
69769 | 4795 % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. |
37713 | 4796 % |
4797 \def\startcontents#1{% | |
69769 | 4798 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should |
4799 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain | |
4800 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. | |
4801 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> | |
4802 \contentsalignmacro | |
4803 \immediate\closeout\tocfile | |
4804 % | |
4805 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. | |
4806 % It is abundantly clear what they are. | |
4807 \def\thischapter{}% | |
4808 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% | |
4809 % | |
4810 \savepageno = \pageno | |
4811 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. | |
4812 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. | |
4813 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. | |
4814 % | |
4815 % Roman numerals for page numbers. | |
4816 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi | |
37713 | 4817 } |
4818 | |
4819 | |
4820 % Normal (long) toc. | |
4821 \def\contents{% | |
69769 | 4822 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% |
4823 \openin 1 \jobname.toc | |
4824 \ifeof 1 \else | |
4825 \readtocfile | |
4826 \fi | |
4827 \vfill \eject | |
4828 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | |
4829 \ifeof 1 \else | |
4830 \pdfmakeoutlines | |
4831 \fi | |
4832 \closein 1 | |
4833 \endgroup | |
4834 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | |
4835 \global\pageno = \savepageno | |
37713 | 4836 } |
4837 | |
4838 % And just the chapters. | |
4839 \def\summarycontents{% | |
69769 | 4840 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% |
4841 % | |
4842 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry | |
4843 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry | |
4844 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry | |
4845 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. | |
4846 \secfonts | |
4847 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf | |
4848 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt | |
4849 \rm | |
4850 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 | |
4851 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. | |
4852 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} | |
4853 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4854 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4855 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4856 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4857 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4858 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4859 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4860 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4861 \openin 1 \jobname.toc | |
4862 \ifeof 1 \else | |
4863 \readtocfile | |
4864 \fi | |
4865 \closein 1 | |
4866 \vfill \eject | |
4867 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | |
4868 \endgroup | |
4869 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | |
4870 \global\pageno = \savepageno | |
37713 | 4871 } |
4872 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents | |
4873 | |
69769 | 4874 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. |
4875 % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. | |
4876 % | |
4877 \def\shortchaplabel#1{% | |
4878 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the | |
4879 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. | |
4880 % But use \hss just in case. | |
4881 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after | |
4882 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) | |
4883 % | |
4884 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange | |
4885 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and | |
4886 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 | |
4887 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters | |
4888 % there are before deciding ... | |
4889 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% | |
4890 } | |
37713 | 4891 |
4892 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. | |
4893 % The first argument is the chapter or section name. | |
4894 % The last argument is the page number. | |
4895 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... | |
4896 | |
47284 | 4897 % Chapters, in the main contents. |
69769 | 4898 \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
47284 | 4899 % |
4900 % Chapters, in the short toc. | |
4901 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. | |
69769 | 4902 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% |
4903 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% | |
37713 | 4904 } |
4905 | |
47284 | 4906 % Appendices, in the main contents. |
69769 | 4907 % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. |
4908 % | |
4909 \def\appendixbox#1{% | |
4910 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. | |
4911 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% | |
4912 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} | |
4913 % | |
4914 \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} | |
47284 | 4915 |
4916 % Unnumbered chapters. | |
69769 | 4917 \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} |
4918 \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} | |
37713 | 4919 |
4920 % Sections. | |
69769 | 4921 \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
4922 \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry | |
4923 \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
37713 | 4924 |
4925 % Subsections. | |
69769 | 4926 \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
4927 \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry | |
4928 \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
37713 | 4929 |
4930 % And subsubsections. | |
69769 | 4931 \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
4932 \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry | |
4933 \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
37713 | 4934 |
4935 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. | |
69769 | 4936 % Same as \defaultparindent. |
4937 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt | |
37713 | 4938 |
4939 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the | |
4940 % page number. | |
4941 % | |
4942 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters | |
4943 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. | |
4944 \def\dochapentry#1#2{% | |
4945 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip | |
4946 \begingroup | |
4947 \chapentryfonts | |
4948 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
4949 \endgroup | |
4950 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip | |
4951 } | |
4952 | |
4953 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
4954 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent | |
4955 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
4956 \endgroup} | |
4957 | |
4958 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
4959 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent | |
4960 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
4961 \endgroup} | |
4962 | |
4963 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
4964 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent | |
4965 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
4966 \endgroup} | |
4967 | |
69769 | 4968 % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. |
4969 \let\tocentry = \entry | |
37713 | 4970 |
4971 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. | |
4972 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} | |
4973 | |
4974 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} | |
4975 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} | |
4976 | |
4977 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} | |
4978 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} | |
69769 | 4979 \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} |
4980 \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} | |
37713 | 4981 |
4982 | |
4983 \message{environments,} | |
4984 % @foo ... @end foo. | |
4985 | |
47284 | 4986 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
4987 % |
37713 | 4988 % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of |
4989 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. | |
47284 | 4990 % |
37713 | 4991 \def\point{$\star$} |
4992 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} | |
4993 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} | |
4994 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} | |
4995 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} | |
4996 | |
47284 | 4997 % The @error{} command. |
37713 | 4998 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
4999 % |
47284 | 5000 \newbox\errorbox |
5001 % | |
37713 | 5002 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. |
5003 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules | |
5004 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) | |
5005 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt} | |
47284 | 5006 % |
69769 | 5007 \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil |
37713 | 5008 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. |
5009 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. | |
69769 | 5010 \vbox{% |
37713 | 5011 \hrule height\dimen2 |
5012 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. | |
5013 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. | |
5014 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. | |
5015 \hrule height\dimen2} | |
5016 \hfil} | |
47284 | 5017 % |
37713 | 5018 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} |
5019 | |
5020 % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. | |
5021 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. | |
5022 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. | |
5023 | |
69769 | 5024 \envdef\tex{% |
37713 | 5025 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
5026 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 | |
69769 | 5027 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie |
37713 | 5028 \catcode `\%=14 |
69769 | 5029 \catcode `\+=\other |
5030 \catcode `\"=\other | |
5031 \catcode `\|=\other | |
5032 \catcode `\<=\other | |
5033 \catcode `\>=\other | |
37713 | 5034 \escapechar=`\\ |
5035 % | |
5036 \let\b=\ptexb | |
5037 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet | |
5038 \let\c=\ptexc | |
5039 \let\,=\ptexcomma | |
5040 \let\.=\ptexdot | |
5041 \let\dots=\ptexdots | |
5042 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv | |
5043 \let\!=\ptexexclam | |
5044 \let\i=\ptexi | |
69769 | 5045 \let\indent=\ptexindent |
5046 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | |
37713 | 5047 \let\{=\ptexlbrace |
5048 \let\+=\tabalign | |
5049 \let\}=\ptexrbrace | |
69769 | 5050 \let\/=\ptexslash |
37713 | 5051 \let\*=\ptexstar |
5052 \let\t=\ptext | |
69769 | 5053 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing |
37713 | 5054 % |
5055 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% | |
5056 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% | |
5057 \def\@{@}% | |
69769 | 5058 } |
5059 % There is no need to define \Etex. | |
37713 | 5060 |
47284 | 5061 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp. |
69769 | 5062 % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, |
47284 | 5063 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). |
37713 | 5064 |
5065 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. | |
5066 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in | |
5067 | |
5068 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other | |
5069 % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't | |
5070 % have any width. | |
5071 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} | |
5072 | |
5073 % This space is always present above and below environments. | |
5074 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt | |
5075 | |
5076 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here | |
5077 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip | |
5078 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the | |
69769 | 5079 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. |
37713 | 5080 % |
47284 | 5081 \def\aboveenvbreak{{% |
69769 | 5082 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and |
5083 % \sectionheading, q.v. | |
5084 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else | |
47284 | 5085 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip |
5086 \endgraf | |
5087 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount | |
5088 \removelastskip | |
69769 | 5089 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak |
5090 % or better ... | |
5091 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi | |
47284 | 5092 \vskip\envskipamount |
5093 \fi | |
5094 \fi | |
5095 }} | |
37713 | 5096 |
5097 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak | |
5098 | |
69769 | 5099 % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will |
5100 % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. | |
37713 | 5101 \let\nonarrowing=\relax |
5102 | |
5103 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around | |
5104 % environment contents. | |
5105 \font\circle=lcircle10 | |
5106 \newdimen\circthick | |
5107 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner | |
5108 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip | |
5109 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle | |
5110 % | |
5111 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth | |
5112 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} | |
5113 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} | |
5114 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} | |
5115 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | |
5116 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr | |
5117 \hskip\rskip}} | |
5118 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | |
5119 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr | |
5120 \hskip\rskip}} | |
5121 % | |
5122 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip | |
5123 | |
69769 | 5124 \envdef\cartouche{% |
5125 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. | |
5126 \startsavinginserts | |
5127 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip | |
5128 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. | |
5129 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip | |
5130 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip | |
5131 \cartouter=\hsize | |
5132 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either | |
5133 % side, and for 6pt waste from | |
5134 % each corner char, and rule thickness | |
5135 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip | |
5136 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. | |
5137 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
5138 \vbox\bgroup | |
5139 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt | |
5140 \carttop | |
5141 \hbox\bgroup | |
5142 \hskip\lskip | |
5143 \vrule\kern3pt | |
5144 \vbox\bgroup | |
5145 \kern3pt | |
5146 \hsize=\cartinner | |
5147 \baselineskip=\normbskip | |
5148 \lineskip=\normlskip | |
5149 \parskip=\normpskip | |
5150 \vskip -\parskip | |
5151 \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. | |
5152 } | |
37713 | 5153 \def\Ecartouche{% |
69769 | 5154 \ifhmode\par\fi |
5155 \kern3pt | |
5156 \egroup | |
5157 \kern3pt\vrule | |
5158 \hskip\rskip | |
5159 \egroup | |
5160 \cartbot | |
5161 \egroup | |
5162 \checkinserts | |
5163 } | |
37713 | 5164 |
5165 | |
5166 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, | |
5167 % inside a group. | |
5168 \def\nonfillstart{% | |
5169 \aboveenvbreak | |
5170 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy | |
5171 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. | |
5172 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines | |
5173 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output | |
5174 \parskip = 0pt | |
5175 \parindent = 0pt | |
5176 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes | |
5177 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | |
5178 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing | |
5179 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing | |
69769 | 5180 \else |
5181 \let\nonarrowing = \relax | |
5182 \fi | |
5183 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent | |
5184 } | |
5185 | |
5186 % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. | |
5187 % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. | |
5188 % This affects the following displayed environments: | |
5189 % @example, @display, @format, @lisp | |
5190 % | |
5191 \def\smallword{small} | |
5192 \def\nosmallword{nosmall} | |
5193 \let\SETdispenvsize\relax | |
5194 \def\setnormaldispenv{% | |
5195 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword | |
5196 \smallexamplefonts \rm | |
5197 \fi | |
5198 } | |
5199 \def\setsmalldispenv{% | |
5200 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword | |
5201 \else | |
5202 \smallexamplefonts \rm | |
37713 | 5203 \fi |
5204 } | |
5205 | |
69769 | 5206 % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. |
5207 % Let's do it by one command: | |
5208 \def\makedispenv #1#2{ | |
5209 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} | |
5210 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} | |
5211 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | |
5212 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | |
5213 } | |
5214 | |
5215 % Define two synonyms: | |
5216 \def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ | |
5217 \makedispenv{#1}{#3} | |
5218 \makedispenv{#2}{#3} | |
5219 } | |
5220 | |
5221 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. | |
5222 % | |
5223 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. | |
5224 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. | |
5225 % | |
5226 \maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% | |
37713 | 5227 \nonfillstart |
5228 \tt | |
5229 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. | |
5230 \gobble % eat return | |
5231 } | |
5232 | |
69769 | 5233 % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. |
5234 % | |
5235 \makedispenv {display}{% | |
37713 | 5236 \nonfillstart |
5237 \gobble | |
5238 } | |
69769 | 5239 |
5240 % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. | |
5241 % | |
5242 \makedispenv{format}{% | |
5243 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
37713 | 5244 \nonfillstart |
5245 \gobble | |
5246 } | |
69769 | 5247 |
5248 % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. | |
5249 \envdef\flushleft{% | |
5250 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
5251 \nonfillstart | |
5252 \gobble | |
5253 } | |
5254 \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak | |
37713 | 5255 |
5256 % @flushright. | |
5257 % | |
69769 | 5258 \envdef\flushright{% |
5259 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
37713 | 5260 \nonfillstart |
5261 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill | |
5262 \gobble | |
5263 } | |
69769 | 5264 \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak |
37713 | 5265 |
5266 | |
5267 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) | |
69769 | 5268 % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since |
5269 % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and | |
5270 % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. | |
5271 % | |
5272 \envdef\quotation{% | |
37713 | 5273 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip |
5274 \parindent=0pt | |
5275 % | |
5276 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. | |
5277 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | |
5278 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing | |
5279 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing | |
5280 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing | |
69769 | 5281 \else |
37713 | 5282 \let\nonarrowing = \relax |
5283 \fi | |
69769 | 5284 \parsearg\quotationlabel |
5285 } | |
5286 | |
5287 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're | |
5288 % doing normal filling. | |
5289 % | |
5290 \def\Equotation{% | |
5291 \par | |
5292 \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else | |
5293 % indent a bit. | |
5294 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% | |
5295 \fi | |
5296 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% | |
5297 } | |
5298 | |
5299 % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. | |
5300 \def\quotationlabel#1{% | |
5301 \def\temp{#1}% | |
5302 \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
5303 {\bf #1: }% | |
5304 \fi | |
37713 | 5305 } |
5306 | |
5307 | |
5308 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5309 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, |
37713 | 5310 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: |
5311 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org | |
5312 % | |
5313 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. | |
5314 % | |
69769 | 5315 % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets |
5316 % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a | |
5317 % verbatim line. | |
37713 | 5318 \def\dospecials{% |
69769 | 5319 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% |
5320 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% | |
5321 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% | |
5322 } | |
37713 | 5323 % |
5324 % [Knuth] p. 380 | |
5325 \def\uncatcodespecials{% | |
69769 | 5326 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} |
37713 | 5327 % |
5328 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 | |
5329 % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font | |
5330 \begingroup | |
5331 \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq} | |
5332 \endgroup | |
5333 % | |
5334 % Setup for the @verb command. | |
5335 % | |
5336 % Eight spaces for a tab | |
5337 \begingroup | |
5338 \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
5339 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} | |
5340 \endgroup | |
5341 % | |
5342 \def\setupverb{% | |
5343 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim | |
5344 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% | |
5345 \catcode`\`=\active | |
5346 \tabeightspaces | |
5347 % Respect line breaks, | |
5348 % print special symbols as themselves, and | |
5349 % make each space count | |
5350 % must do in this order: | |
5351 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | |
5352 } | |
5353 | |
5354 % Setup for the @verbatim environment | |
5355 % | |
5356 % Real tab expansion | |
5357 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount | |
5358 % | |
5359 \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} | |
5360 \begingroup | |
5361 \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
5362 \gdef\tabexpand{% | |
5363 \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
5364 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup | |
5365 \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab | |
5366 \divide\dimen0 by\tabw | |
5367 \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw | |
5368 \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw | |
5369 \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox | |
5370 }% | |
5371 } | |
5372 \endgroup | |
5373 \def\setupverbatim{% | |
69769 | 5374 \let\nonarrowing = t% |
5375 \nonfillstart | |
37713 | 5376 % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim |
5377 \tt | |
5378 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% | |
5379 \catcode`\`=\active | |
5380 \tabexpand | |
5381 % Respect line breaks, | |
5382 % print special symbols as themselves, and | |
5383 % make each space count | |
5384 % must do in this order: | |
5385 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | |
5386 \everypar{\starttabbox}% | |
5387 } | |
5388 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5389 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique |
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5390 % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a |
37713 | 5391 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: |
5392 % | |
5393 % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} | |
5394 % | |
5395 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} | |
5396 \begingroup | |
69769 | 5397 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other |
37713 | 5398 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] |
5399 \endgroup | |
5400 % | |
5401 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} | |
5402 % | |
5403 % | |
5404 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that | |
5405 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: | |
5406 % | |
5407 % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} | |
5408 % | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5409 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, |
37713 | 5410 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': |
69769 | 5411 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. |
37713 | 5412 % |
5413 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] | |
69769 | 5414 % |
37713 | 5415 \begingroup |
5416 \catcode`\ =\active | |
69769 | 5417 \obeylines % |
5418 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end | |
5419 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank | |
5420 % line in the output. | |
5421 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% | |
5422 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but | |
5423 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. | |
37713 | 5424 \endgroup |
5425 % | |
69769 | 5426 \envdef\verbatim{% |
5427 \setupverbatim\doverbatim | |
5428 } | |
5429 \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak | |
5430 | |
37713 | 5431 |
5432 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. | |
5433 % | |
69769 | 5434 \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} |
37713 | 5435 % |
5436 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% | |
69769 | 5437 {% |
5438 \makevalueexpandable | |
5439 \setupverbatim | |
5440 \input #1 | |
5441 \afterenvbreak | |
5442 }% | |
37713 | 5443 } |
5444 | |
47284 | 5445 % @copying ... @end copying. |
5446 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5447 % |
69769 | 5448 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. |
5449 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the | |
5450 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done | |
5451 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source | |
5452 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as | |
5453 % possible is very desirable. | |
5454 % | |
5455 \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} | |
5456 \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} | |
5457 % | |
5458 \def\insertcopying{% | |
5459 \begingroup | |
5460 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page | |
5461 \scanexp\copyingtext | |
5462 \endgroup | |
5463 } | |
37713 | 5464 |
5465 \message{defuns,} | |
5466 % @defun etc. | |
5467 | |
5468 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in | |
5469 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt | |
5470 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt | |
5471 | |
69769 | 5472 % Start the processing of @deffn: |
5473 \def\startdefun{% | |
5474 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 | |
5475 \medbreak | |
5476 \else | |
5477 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, | |
5478 % which is there to keep the function description together with its | |
5479 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a | |
5480 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted | |
5481 % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning | |
5482 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow | |
5483 % a break between a section heading and a defun. | |
5484 % | |
5485 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi | |
5486 % | |
5487 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. | |
5488 % But do insert the glue. | |
5489 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint | |
5490 \fi | |
47284 | 5491 % |
37713 | 5492 \parindent=0in |
5493 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | |
5494 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | |
47284 | 5495 } |
5496 | |
69769 | 5497 \def\dodefunx#1{% |
5498 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: | |
5499 \checkenv#1% | |
5500 % | |
5501 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. | |
5502 % It's not a great place, though. | |
5503 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi | |
5504 % | |
5505 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: | |
5506 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% | |
5507 } | |
5508 \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} | |
5509 | |
5510 % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} | |
5511 % | |
5512 \def\printdefunline#1#2{% | |
37713 | 5513 \begingroup |
69769 | 5514 % call \deffnheader: |
5515 #1#2 \endheader | |
5516 % common ending: | |
5517 \interlinepenalty = 10000 | |
5518 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil | |
5519 \endgraf | |
5520 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip | |
5521 \penalty 10002 % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx | |
5522 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, | |
5523 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. | |
5524 \checkparencounts | |
37713 | 5525 \endgroup |
5526 } | |
5527 | |
69769 | 5528 \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} |
5529 | |
5530 % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; | |
5531 % the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader. | |
5532 % | |
5533 \def\makedefun#1{% | |
5534 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun | |
5535 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun | |
5536 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% | |
5537 \temp | |
5538 } | |
5539 | |
5540 % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader | |
5541 % | |
5542 % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. | |
5543 % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. | |
5544 % | |
5545 \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% | |
5546 \envdef#1{% | |
5547 \startdefun | |
5548 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% | |
5549 }% | |
5550 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% | |
5551 \def#3% | |
5552 } | |
5553 | |
5554 %%% Untyped functions: | |
5555 | |
5556 % @deffn category name args | |
5557 \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} | |
5558 | |
5559 % @deffn category class name args | |
5560 \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | |
5561 | |
5562 % \defopon {category on}class name args | |
5563 \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
5564 | |
5565 % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args | |
5566 % | |
5567 \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% | |
5568 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. | |
5569 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% | |
5570 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% | |
5571 } | |
5572 | |
5573 %%% Typed functions: | |
5574 | |
5575 % @deftypefn category type name args | |
5576 \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} | |
5577 | |
5578 % @deftypeop category class type name args | |
5579 \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | |
5580 | |
5581 % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args | |
5582 \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
5583 | |
5584 % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args | |
5585 % | |
5586 \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | |
5587 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | |
5588 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | |
5589 } | |
5590 | |
5591 %%% Typed variables: | |
5592 | |
5593 % @deftypevr category type var args | |
5594 \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} | |
5595 | |
5596 % @deftypecv category class type var args | |
5597 \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | |
5598 | |
5599 % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args | |
5600 \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
5601 | |
5602 % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args | |
5603 % | |
5604 \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | |
5605 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | |
5606 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | |
5607 } | |
5608 | |
5609 %%% Untyped variables: | |
5610 | |
5611 % @defvr category var args | |
5612 \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } | |
5613 | |
5614 % @defcv category class var args | |
5615 \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | |
5616 | |
5617 % \defcvof {category of}class var args | |
5618 \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } | |
5619 | |
5620 %%% Type: | |
5621 % @deftp category name args | |
5622 \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% | |
5623 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% | |
5624 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% | |
5625 } | |
5626 | |
5627 % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: | |
5628 \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | |
5629 \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } | |
5630 \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } | |
5631 \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | |
5632 \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | |
5633 \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } | |
5634 \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | |
5635 \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} | |
5636 \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} | |
5637 \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | |
5638 \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | |
5639 | |
5640 % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). | |
5641 % #1 is the category, such as "Function". | |
5642 % #2 is the return type, if any. | |
5643 % #3 is the function name. | |
5644 % | |
5645 % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. | |
5646 % | |
5647 \def\defname#1#2#3{% | |
5648 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... | |
5649 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent | |
5650 % | |
5651 % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps | |
5652 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line | |
5653 % just below it. | |
5654 \def\temp{#1}% | |
5655 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} | |
5656 % | |
5657 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. | |
5658 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, | |
5659 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: | |
5660 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip | |
5661 % The continuations: | |
5662 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent | |
5663 % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) | |
5664 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 | |
5665 % | |
5666 % Put the type name to the right margin. | |
5667 \noindent | |
5668 \hbox to 0pt{% | |
5669 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize | |
5670 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: | |
5671 \kern\leftskip | |
5672 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. | |
5673 }% | |
5674 % | |
5675 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: | |
5676 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 | |
5677 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | |
5678 {% | |
5679 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: | |
5680 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. | |
5681 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's | |
5682 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in | |
5683 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. | |
5684 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. | |
5685 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no | |
5686 % one has made identifiers using them :). | |
5687 \df \tt | |
5688 \def\temp{#2}% return value type | |
5689 \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi | |
5690 #3% output function name | |
5691 }% | |
5692 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm | |
5693 % | |
5694 \boldbrax | |
5695 % arguments will be output next, if any. | |
5696 } | |
5697 | |
5698 % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using | |
5699 % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in | |
5700 % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very | |
5701 % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. | |
5702 % | |
5703 \def\defunargs#1{% | |
5704 % use sl by default (not ttsl), | |
5705 % tt for the names. | |
5706 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 | |
5707 % | |
5708 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we | |
5709 % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. | |
5710 \let\var=\ttslanted | |
5711 #1% | |
5712 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 | |
5713 } | |
5714 | |
5715 % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. | |
5716 % | |
5717 \def\activeparens{% | |
5718 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active | |
5719 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active | |
5720 \catcode`\&=\active | |
5721 } | |
5722 | |
5723 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. | |
5724 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) | |
5725 | |
5726 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, | |
5727 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, | |
5728 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. | |
5729 { | |
5730 \activeparens | |
5731 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen | |
5732 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack | |
5733 \global\let& = \& | |
5734 | |
5735 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} | |
5736 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} | |
5737 } | |
5738 | |
5739 \newcount\parencount | |
5740 | |
5741 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards | |
5742 \newif\ifampseen | |
5743 \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} | |
5744 | |
5745 \def\parenfont{% | |
5746 \ifampseen | |
5747 % At the first level, print parens in roman, | |
5748 % otherwise use the default font. | |
5749 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi | |
5750 \else | |
5751 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than | |
5752 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . | |
5753 \sf | |
5754 \fi | |
5755 } | |
5756 \def\infirstlevel#1{% | |
5757 \ifampseen | |
5758 \ifnum\parencount=1 | |
5759 #1% | |
5760 \fi | |
5761 \fi | |
5762 } | |
5763 \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} | |
5764 | |
5765 \def\opnr{% | |
5766 \global\advance\parencount by 1 | |
5767 {\parenfont(}% | |
5768 \infirstlevel \bfafterword | |
5769 } | |
5770 \def\clnr{% | |
5771 {\parenfont)}% | |
5772 \infirstlevel \sl | |
5773 \global\advance\parencount by -1 | |
5774 } | |
5775 | |
5776 \newcount\brackcount | |
5777 \def\lbrb{% | |
5778 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 | |
5779 {\bf[}% | |
5780 } | |
5781 \def\rbrb{% | |
5782 {\bf]}% | |
5783 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 | |
5784 } | |
5785 | |
5786 \def\checkparencounts{% | |
5787 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi | |
5788 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi | |
5789 } | |
5790 \def\badparencount{% | |
5791 \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}% | |
5792 \global\parencount=0 | |
5793 } | |
5794 \def\badbrackcount{% | |
5795 \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}% | |
5796 \global\brackcount=0 | |
5797 } | |
37713 | 5798 |
5799 | |
5800 \message{macros,} | |
5801 % @macro. | |
5802 | |
5803 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, | |
5804 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. | |
5805 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined | |
69769 | 5806 \newwrite\macscribble |
5807 \def\scantokens#1{% | |
5808 \toks0={#1}% | |
5809 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp | |
5810 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% | |
5811 \immediate\closeout\macscribble | |
5812 \input \jobname.tmp | |
5813 } | |
5814 \fi | |
5815 | |
37713 | 5816 \def\scanmacro#1{% |
69769 | 5817 \begingroup |
5818 \newlinechar`\^^M | |
5819 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces | |
5820 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex | |
5821 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active | |
5822 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had | |
5823 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears | |
5824 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 | |
5825 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ | |
5826 % ... and \example | |
5827 \spaceisspace | |
5828 % | |
5829 % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. | |
5830 % | |
5831 % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX | |
5832 % --kasal, 29nov03 | |
5833 \scantokens{#1\endinput}% | |
5834 \endgroup | |
5835 } | |
5836 | |
5837 \def\scanexp#1{% | |
5838 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% | |
5839 \temp | |
5840 } | |
37713 | 5841 |
5842 \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters | |
5843 \newtoks\macname % Macro name | |
5844 \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? | |
69769 | 5845 |
5846 % List of all defined macros in the form | |
5847 % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... | |
5848 % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split | |
5849 % if there is a need. | |
5850 \def\macrolist{} | |
5851 | |
5852 % Add the macro to \macrolist | |
5853 \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} | |
5854 \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% | |
5855 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% | |
5856 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% | |
5857 } | |
37713 | 5858 |
5859 % Utility routines. | |
69769 | 5860 % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, |
5861 % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname | |
5862 % (except of course we have to play expansion games). | |
5863 % | |
37713 | 5864 \def\cslet#1#2{% |
69769 | 5865 \expandafter\let |
5866 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname | |
5867 \csname#2\endcsname | |
5868 } | |
37713 | 5869 |
5870 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. | |
5871 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). | |
5872 {\catcode`\@=11 | |
5873 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} | |
5874 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} | |
5875 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} | |
5876 \def\unbrace#1{#1} | |
5877 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} | |
5878 } | |
5879 | |
5880 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. | |
69769 | 5881 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% |
37713 | 5882 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% |
5883 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% | |
5884 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% | |
5885 } | |
5886 | |
5887 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where | |
5888 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active | |
5889 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. | |
5890 | |
5891 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is | |
5892 % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro | |
5893 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. | |
5894 | |
69769 | 5895 \def\scanctxt{% |
5896 \catcode`\"=\other | |
5897 \catcode`\+=\other | |
5898 \catcode`\<=\other | |
5899 \catcode`\>=\other | |
5900 \catcode`\@=\other | |
5901 \catcode`\^=\other | |
5902 \catcode`\_=\other | |
5903 \catcode`\|=\other | |
5904 \catcode`\~=\other | |
5905 } | |
5906 | |
5907 \def\scanargctxt{% | |
5908 \scanctxt | |
5909 \catcode`\\=\other | |
5910 \catcode`\^^M=\other | |
5911 } | |
5912 | |
37713 | 5913 \def\macrobodyctxt{% |
69769 | 5914 \scanctxt |
5915 \catcode`\{=\other | |
5916 \catcode`\}=\other | |
5917 \catcode`\^^M=\other | |
5918 \usembodybackslash | |
5919 } | |
37713 | 5920 |
5921 \def\macroargctxt{% | |
69769 | 5922 \scanctxt |
5923 \catcode`\\=\other | |
5924 } | |
37713 | 5925 |
5926 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. | |
5927 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N | |
5928 % where N is the macro parameter number. | |
5929 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so | |
5930 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. | |
5931 | |
5932 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active | |
5933 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} | |
5934 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} | |
5935 } | |
5936 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} | |
5937 | |
5938 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} | |
5939 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} | |
5940 | |
5941 \def\macroxxx#1{% | |
5942 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist | |
5943 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments | |
5944 \paramno=0% | |
5945 \else | |
5946 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% | |
5947 \fi | |
5948 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname | |
5949 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% | |
5950 \else | |
5951 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax | |
47284 | 5952 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi |
37713 | 5953 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% |
5954 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% | |
69769 | 5955 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% |
37713 | 5956 \fi |
5957 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt | |
5958 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody | |
5959 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody | |
5960 \fi} | |
5961 | |
69769 | 5962 \parseargdef\unmacro{% |
37713 | 5963 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname |
5964 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% | |
5965 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% | |
69769 | 5966 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: |
37713 | 5967 \begingroup |
69769 | 5968 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax |
5969 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo | |
5970 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% | |
37713 | 5971 \endgroup |
5972 \else | |
5973 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% | |
5974 \fi | |
5975 } | |
5976 | |
69769 | 5977 % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any |
5978 % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. | |
5979 % | |
5980 \def\unmacrodo#1{% | |
5981 \ifx #1\relax | |
5982 % remove this | |
5983 \else | |
5984 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% | |
5985 \fi | |
5986 } | |
5987 | |
37713 | 5988 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a |
5989 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by | |
5990 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. | |
5991 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} | |
5992 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} | |
5993 \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} | |
5994 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} | |
5995 | |
5996 % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist | |
5997 % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah | |
5998 % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. | |
5999 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). | |
6000 | |
6001 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. | |
6002 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something | |
6003 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine | |
6004 % it to # just before using the token list produced. | |
6005 % | |
6006 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before | |
6007 % the macro is used. | |
6008 | |
6009 \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% | |
6010 \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} | |
6011 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% | |
6012 \if#1;\let\next=\relax | |
6013 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx | |
6014 \advance\paramno by 1% | |
6015 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname | |
6016 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% | |
6017 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% | |
6018 \fi\next} | |
6019 | |
6020 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. | |
6021 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) | |
6022 | |
6023 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% | |
6024 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | |
6025 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% | |
6026 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | |
6027 | |
6028 % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and | |
6029 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. | |
6030 % Much magic with \expandafter here. | |
6031 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file | |
6032 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. | |
6033 \def\defmacro{% | |
6034 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars | |
6035 \ifrecursive | |
6036 \ifcase\paramno | |
6037 % 0 | |
6038 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6039 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
6040 \or % 1 | |
6041 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6042 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
6043 \noexpand\braceorline | |
6044 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | |
6045 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | |
6046 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
6047 \else % many | |
6048 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6049 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
6050 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | |
6051 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | |
6052 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | |
6053 \expandafter\expandafter | |
6054 \expandafter\xdef | |
6055 \expandafter\expandafter | |
6056 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | |
6057 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
6058 \fi | |
6059 \else | |
6060 \ifcase\paramno | |
6061 % 0 | |
6062 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6063 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
6064 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
6065 \or % 1 | |
6066 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6067 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
6068 \noexpand\braceorline | |
6069 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | |
6070 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | |
6071 \egroup | |
6072 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
6073 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
6074 \else % many | |
6075 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6076 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
6077 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | |
6078 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | |
6079 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | |
6080 \expandafter\expandafter | |
6081 \expandafter\xdef | |
6082 \expandafter\expandafter | |
6083 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | |
6084 \paramlist{% | |
6085 \egroup | |
6086 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
6087 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
6088 \fi | |
6089 \fi} | |
6090 | |
6091 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} | |
6092 | |
6093 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a | |
6094 % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole | |
6095 % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence | |
6096 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) | |
69769 | 6097 \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} |
37713 | 6098 \def\braceorlinexxx{% |
6099 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else | |
6100 \expandafter\parsearg | |
69769 | 6101 \fi \macnamexxx} |
37713 | 6102 |
6103 | |
6104 % @alias. | |
6105 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal | |
6106 % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. | |
69769 | 6107 \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} |
37713 | 6108 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} |
69769 | 6109 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% |
6110 {% | |
6111 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty | |
6112 \addtomacrolist{#1}% | |
6113 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% | |
6114 }% | |
6115 \next | |
6116 } | |
37713 | 6117 |
6118 | |
6119 \message{cross references,} | |
6120 | |
6121 \newwrite\auxfile | |
6122 | |
6123 \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. | |
6124 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. | |
6125 | |
6126 % @inforef is relatively simple. | |
6127 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} | |
6128 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, | |
6129 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} | |
6130 | |
69769 | 6131 % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in |
6132 % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and | |
6133 % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: | |
6134 % @node foo , bar , ... | |
6135 % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. | |
6136 % | |
6137 \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} | |
6138 % | |
6139 % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: | |
6140 % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs | |
6141 \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} | |
6142 \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} | |
6143 | |
37713 | 6144 \let\nwnode=\node |
69769 | 6145 \let\lastnode=\empty |
6146 | |
6147 % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the | |
6148 % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). | |
6149 % | |
6150 \def\donoderef#1{% | |
6151 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else | |
6152 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% | |
6153 \global\let\lastnode=\empty | |
37713 | 6154 \fi |
6155 } | |
6156 | |
6157 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. | |
6158 % | |
6159 \newcount\savesfregister | |
69769 | 6160 % |
6161 \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} | |
6162 \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} | |
6163 \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} | |
6164 | |
6165 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an | |
6166 % anchor), which consists of three parts: | |
6167 % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection, | |
6168 % or the anchor name. | |
6169 % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or | |
6170 % empty for anchors. | |
6171 % 3) NAME-pg - the page number. | |
6172 % | |
6173 % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of | |
6174 % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: | |
6175 % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. | |
6176 % | |
6177 \def\setref#1#2{% | |
37713 | 6178 \pdfmkdest{#1}% |
69769 | 6179 \iflinks |
6180 {% | |
6181 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them | |
6182 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% | |
6183 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef | |
6184 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef | |
6185 }% | |
6186 \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}% | |
6187 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% | |
6188 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. | |
6189 \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout | |
6190 }% | |
6191 \fi | |
6192 } | |
37713 | 6193 |
6194 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is | |
6195 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed | |
6196 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed | |
6197 % manual. All but the node name can be omitted. | |
6198 % | |
6199 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
6200 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
6201 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
6202 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup | |
6203 \unsepspaces | |
6204 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% | |
69769 | 6205 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% |
6206 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% | |
6207 \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% | |
37713 | 6208 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt |
6209 % No printed node name was explicitly given. | |
6210 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax | |
6211 % Use the node name inside the square brackets. | |
69769 | 6212 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
37713 | 6213 \else |
6214 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside | |
6215 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. | |
6216 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
6217 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. | |
69769 | 6218 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
37713 | 6219 \else |
6220 \ifhavexrefs | |
6221 % We know the real title if we have the xref values. | |
69769 | 6222 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% |
37713 | 6223 \else |
6224 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. | |
69769 | 6225 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
37713 | 6226 \fi% |
6227 \fi | |
6228 \fi | |
6229 \fi | |
6230 % | |
69769 | 6231 % Make link in pdf output. |
37713 | 6232 \ifpdf |
6233 \leavevmode | |
6234 \getfilename{#4}% | |
69769 | 6235 {\turnoffactive |
6236 % See comments at \activebackslashdouble. | |
6237 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% | |
6238 \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}% | |
6239 % | |
47284 | 6240 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 |
6241 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | |
69769 | 6242 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% |
47284 | 6243 \else |
6244 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | |
69769 | 6245 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% |
47284 | 6246 \fi |
6247 }% | |
37713 | 6248 \linkcolor |
6249 \fi | |
6250 % | |
69769 | 6251 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" |
6252 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the | |
6253 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. | |
6254 {% | |
6255 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to | |
6256 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. | |
6257 \indexnofonts | |
6258 \turnoffactive | |
6259 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle | |
6260 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname | |
6261 }% | |
6262 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle | |
6263 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, | |
6264 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". | |
6265 \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt | |
6266 \refx{#1-snt}{}% | |
6267 \else | |
6268 \printedrefname | |
6269 \fi | |
6270 % | |
6271 % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append | |
6272 % "in MANUALNAME". | |
6273 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
6274 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | |
6275 \fi | |
37713 | 6276 \else |
69769 | 6277 % node/anchor (non-float) references. |
6278 % | |
6279 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not | |
6280 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will | |
6281 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals | |
6282 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this | |
6283 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it | |
6284 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. | |
6285 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
6286 \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | |
6287 \else | |
6288 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the | |
6289 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand | |
6290 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of | |
6291 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the | |
6292 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. | |
6293 {\turnoffactive | |
6294 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for | |
6295 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. | |
6296 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% | |
6297 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi | |
6298 }% | |
6299 % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. | |
6300 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname | |
6301 % | |
6302 % But we always want a comma and a space: | |
6303 ,\space | |
6304 % | |
6305 % output the `page 3'. | |
6306 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% | |
6307 \fi | |
37713 | 6308 \fi |
6309 \endlink | |
6310 \endgroup} | |
6311 | |
69769 | 6312 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref |
6313 % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, | |
6314 % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly | |
6315 % one that Bob is working on :). | |
6316 % | |
6317 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} | |
6318 | |
6319 % Things referred to by \setref. | |
6320 % | |
37713 | 6321 \def\Ynothing{} |
69769 | 6322 \def\Yomitfromtoc{} |
6323 \def\Ynumbered{% | |
6324 \ifnum\secno=0 | |
6325 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno | |
6326 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | |
6327 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno | |
6328 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | |
6329 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | |
6330 \else | |
6331 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | |
6332 \fi\fi\fi | |
6333 } | |
6334 \def\Yappendix{% | |
6335 \ifnum\secno=0 | |
6336 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% | |
6337 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | |
6338 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno | |
6339 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | |
6340 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | |
6341 \else | |
6342 \putwordSection@tie | |
6343 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | |
6344 \fi\fi\fi | |
6345 } | |
37713 | 6346 |
6347 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. | |
6348 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. | |
69769 | 6349 % |
37713 | 6350 \def\refx#1#2{% |
69769 | 6351 {% |
6352 \indexnofonts | |
6353 \otherbackslash | |
6354 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX | |
6355 \csname XR#1\endcsname | |
6356 }% | |
6357 \ifx\thisrefX\relax | |
37713 | 6358 % If not defined, say something at least. |
6359 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright | |
6360 \iflinks | |
6361 \ifhavexrefs | |
6362 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% | |
6363 \else | |
6364 \ifwarnedxrefs\else | |
6365 \global\warnedxrefstrue | |
6366 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% | |
6367 \fi | |
6368 \fi | |
6369 \fi | |
6370 \else | |
6371 % It's defined, so just use it. | |
69769 | 6372 \thisrefX |
37713 | 6373 \fi |
6374 #2% Output the suffix in any case. | |
6375 } | |
6376 | |
69769 | 6377 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's |
6378 % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid | |
6379 % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. | |
6380 % | |
6381 \def\xrdef#1#2{% | |
6382 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value. | |
6383 % | |
6384 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? | |
6385 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname | |
6386 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. | |
6387 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist | |
6388 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname | |
6389 % | |
6390 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? | |
6391 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax | |
6392 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do | |
6393 \else | |
6394 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. | |
6395 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% | |
6396 \fi | |
6397 % | |
6398 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, | |
6399 % for later use in \listoffloats. | |
6400 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}% | |
6401 \fi | |
37713 | 6402 } |
6403 | |
6404 % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. | |
69769 | 6405 % |
6406 \def\tryauxfile{% | |
6407 \openin 1 \jobname.aux | |
6408 \ifeof 1 \else | |
6409 \readdatafile{aux}% | |
6410 \global\havexrefstrue | |
6411 \fi | |
6412 \closein 1 | |
6413 } | |
6414 | |
6415 \def\setupdatafile{% | |
37713 | 6416 \catcode`\^^@=\other |
6417 \catcode`\^^A=\other | |
6418 \catcode`\^^B=\other | |
6419 \catcode`\^^C=\other | |
6420 \catcode`\^^D=\other | |
6421 \catcode`\^^E=\other | |
6422 \catcode`\^^F=\other | |
6423 \catcode`\^^G=\other | |
6424 \catcode`\^^H=\other | |
6425 \catcode`\^^K=\other | |
6426 \catcode`\^^L=\other | |
6427 \catcode`\^^N=\other | |
6428 \catcode`\^^P=\other | |
6429 \catcode`\^^Q=\other | |
6430 \catcode`\^^R=\other | |
6431 \catcode`\^^S=\other | |
6432 \catcode`\^^T=\other | |
6433 \catcode`\^^U=\other | |
6434 \catcode`\^^V=\other | |
6435 \catcode`\^^W=\other | |
6436 \catcode`\^^X=\other | |
6437 \catcode`\^^Z=\other | |
6438 \catcode`\^^[=\other | |
6439 \catcode`\^^\=\other | |
6440 \catcode`\^^]=\other | |
6441 \catcode`\^^^=\other | |
6442 \catcode`\^^_=\other | |
69769 | 6443 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. |
37713 | 6444 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't |
6445 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, | |
6446 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ | |
6447 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat | |
6448 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first | |
6449 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could | |
6450 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. | |
6451 % | |
6452 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: | |
6453 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter | |
6454 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. | |
6455 % | |
69769 | 6456 \catcode`\^=\other |
6457 % | |
6458 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... | |
37713 | 6459 \catcode`\~=\other |
6460 \catcode`\[=\other | |
6461 \catcode`\]=\other | |
6462 \catcode`\"=\other | |
6463 \catcode`\_=\other | |
6464 \catcode`\|=\other | |
6465 \catcode`\<=\other | |
6466 \catcode`\>=\other | |
6467 \catcode`\$=\other | |
6468 \catcode`\#=\other | |
6469 \catcode`\&=\other | |
69769 | 6470 \catcode`\%=\other |
37713 | 6471 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off |
69769 | 6472 % |
6473 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ | |
6474 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than | |
6475 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ | |
6476 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* | |
6477 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that | |
6478 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for | |
6479 % now. --karl, 15jan04. | |
6480 \catcode`\\=\other | |
6481 % | |
6482 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. | |
37713 | 6483 {% |
69769 | 6484 \count1=128 |
37713 | 6485 \def\loop{% |
69769 | 6486 \catcode\count1=\other |
6487 \advance\count1 by 1 | |
6488 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi | |
37713 | 6489 }% |
6490 }% | |
69769 | 6491 % |
6492 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. | |
37713 | 6493 \catcode`\{=1 |
6494 \catcode`\}=2 | |
69769 | 6495 \catcode`\@=0 |
6496 } | |
6497 | |
6498 \def\readdatafile#1{% | |
6499 \begingroup | |
6500 \setupdatafile | |
6501 \input\jobname.#1 | |
37713 | 6502 \endgroup} |
6503 | |
69769 | 6504 \message{insertions,} |
6505 % including footnotes. | |
37713 | 6506 |
6507 \newcount \footnoteno | |
6508 | |
6509 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is | |
6510 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a | |
6511 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is | |
6512 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a | |
6513 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) | |
6514 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } | |
6515 | |
6516 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. | |
6517 \let\footnotestyle=\comment | |
6518 | |
6519 {\catcode `\@=11 | |
6520 % | |
6521 % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. | |
6522 \gdef\footnote{% | |
69769 | 6523 \let\indent=\ptexindent |
6524 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | |
37713 | 6525 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne |
6526 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% | |
6527 % | |
6528 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the | |
6529 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. | |
6530 \let\@sf\empty | |
69769 | 6531 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi |
37713 | 6532 % |
6533 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. | |
6534 \unskip | |
6535 \thisfootno\@sf | |
69769 | 6536 \dofootnote |
37713 | 6537 }% |
6538 | |
6539 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the | |
6540 % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. | |
6541 % | |
69769 | 6542 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses |
6543 % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when | |
37713 | 6544 % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. |
6545 % | |
69769 | 6546 \gdef\dofootnote{% |
6547 \insert\footins\bgroup | |
37713 | 6548 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the |
6549 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. | |
6550 % So reset some parameters. | |
69769 | 6551 \hsize=\pagewidth |
37713 | 6552 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty |
6553 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes | |
6554 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox | |
6555 \floatingpenalty\@MM | |
6556 \leftskip\z@skip | |
6557 \rightskip\z@skip | |
6558 \spaceskip\z@skip | |
6559 \xspaceskip\z@skip | |
6560 \parindent\defaultparindent | |
6561 % | |
6562 \smallfonts \rm | |
6563 % | |
47284 | 6564 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears |
6565 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use | |
6566 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote | |
6567 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). | |
6568 \let\noindent = \relax | |
6569 % | |
6570 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the | |
6571 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. | |
6572 \everypar = {\hang}% | |
37713 | 6573 \textindent{\thisfootno}% |
6574 % | |
6575 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this | |
6576 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it | |
6577 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. | |
6578 \footstrut | |
6579 \futurelet\next\fo@t | |
6580 } | |
6581 }%end \catcode `\@=11 | |
6582 | |
69769 | 6583 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create |
6584 % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion | |
6585 % would be lost. | |
6586 % Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote | |
6587 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. | |
6588 % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. | |
6589 | |
6590 % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. | |
6591 % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled | |
6592 % out prematurely. | |
6593 % | |
6594 \def\startsavinginserts{% | |
6595 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert | |
6596 \let\insert\saveinsert | |
6597 \else | |
6598 \let\checkinserts\relax | |
6599 \fi | |
6600 } | |
6601 | |
6602 % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and | |
6603 % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. | |
6604 % | |
6605 \def\saveinsert#1{% | |
6606 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% | |
6607 \afterassignment\next | |
6608 % swallow the left brace | |
6609 \let\temp = | |
6610 } | |
6611 \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} | |
6612 \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} | |
6613 | |
6614 \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} | |
6615 | |
6616 \def\placesaveins#1{% | |
6617 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname | |
6618 {\box#1}% | |
6619 } | |
6620 | |
6621 % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: | |
6622 { | |
6623 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) | |
6624 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} | |
6625 } | |
6626 | |
6627 % initialization: | |
6628 \def\newsaveins #1{% | |
6629 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% | |
6630 \next | |
6631 } | |
6632 \def\newsaveinsX #1{% | |
6633 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% | |
6634 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts | |
6635 \checksaveins #1}% | |
6636 } | |
6637 | |
6638 % initialize: | |
6639 \let\checkinserts\empty | |
6640 \newsaveins\footins | |
6641 \newsaveins\margin | |
6642 | |
37713 | 6643 |
6644 % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. | |
6645 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. | |
6646 % | |
6647 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image | |
6648 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get | |
6649 % undone and the next image would fail. | |
6650 \openin 1 = epsf.tex | |
6651 \ifeof 1 \else | |
69769 | 6652 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in |
6653 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). | |
37713 | 6654 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% |
6655 \input epsf.tex | |
6656 \fi | |
69769 | 6657 \closein 1 |
37713 | 6658 % |
6659 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. | |
6660 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf | |
6661 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to | |
6662 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get | |
6663 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} | |
6664 % | |
6665 \def\image#1{% | |
6666 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined | |
6667 \ifwarnednoepsf \else | |
6668 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp | |
6669 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% | |
6670 \global\warnednoepsftrue | |
6671 \fi | |
6672 \else | |
47284 | 6673 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish |
37713 | 6674 \fi |
6675 } | |
6676 % | |
6677 % Arguments to @image: | |
6678 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. | |
6679 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. | |
47284 | 6680 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. |
6681 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension. | |
6682 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. | |
6683 \newif\ifimagevmode | |
6684 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup | |
6685 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example | |
6686 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names | |
6687 % If the image is by itself, center it. | |
6688 \ifvmode | |
6689 \imagevmodetrue | |
6690 \nobreak\bigskip | |
6691 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert | |
6692 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
6693 % above and below. |
47284 | 6694 \nobreak\vskip\parskip |
6695 \nobreak | |
69769 | 6696 \line\bgroup |
47284 | 6697 \fi |
6698 % | |
6699 % Output the image. | |
37713 | 6700 \ifpdf |
47284 | 6701 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% |
37713 | 6702 \else |
6703 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. | |
6704 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi | |
6705 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi | |
47284 | 6706 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% |
37713 | 6707 \fi |
47284 | 6708 % |
69769 | 6709 \ifimagevmode \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image |
47284 | 6710 \endgroup} |
37713 | 6711 |
6712 | |
69769 | 6713 % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, |
6714 % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the | |
6715 % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. | |
6716 % | |
6717 \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} | |
6718 | |
6719 % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. | |
6720 \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} | |
6721 | |
6722 % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically | |
6723 % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, | |
6724 % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. | |
6725 % | |
6726 % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to | |
6727 % be referable. | |
6728 % | |
6729 % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It | |
6730 % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). | |
6731 % | |
6732 % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each | |
6733 % chapter-level command. | |
6734 \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty | |
6735 % | |
6736 \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% | |
6737 \let\thiscaption=\empty | |
6738 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty | |
6739 % | |
6740 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. | |
6741 % | |
6742 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an | |
6743 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 | |
6744 % | |
6745 \startsavinginserts | |
6746 % | |
6747 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. | |
6748 \par | |
6749 % | |
6750 \vtop\bgroup | |
6751 \def\floattype{#1}% | |
6752 \def\floatlabel{#2}% | |
6753 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. | |
6754 % | |
6755 \ifx\floattype\empty | |
6756 \let\safefloattype=\empty | |
6757 \else | |
6758 {% | |
6759 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | |
6760 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | |
6761 \indexnofonts | |
6762 \turnoffactive | |
6763 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | |
6764 }% | |
6765 \fi | |
6766 % | |
6767 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. | |
6768 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
6769 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, | |
6770 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) | |
6771 % | |
6772 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname | |
6773 \global\advance\floatno by 1 | |
6774 % | |
6775 {% | |
6776 % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the | |
6777 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float | |
6778 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from | |
6779 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the | |
6780 % lists of floats. | |
6781 % | |
6782 \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% | |
6783 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% | |
6784 }% | |
6785 \fi | |
6786 % | |
6787 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. | |
6788 \vskip\parskip | |
6789 % | |
6790 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. | |
6791 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
6792 } | |
6793 | |
6794 % we have these possibilities: | |
6795 % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap | |
6796 % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 | |
6797 % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap | |
6798 % @float Foo & no caption: Foo | |
6799 % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap | |
6800 % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 | |
6801 % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap | |
6802 % @float & no caption: | |
6803 % | |
6804 \def\Efloat{% | |
6805 \let\floatident = \empty | |
6806 % | |
6807 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. | |
6808 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi | |
6809 % | |
6810 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. | |
6811 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
6812 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. | |
6813 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% | |
6814 \fi | |
6815 % the number. | |
6816 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% | |
6817 \fi | |
6818 % | |
6819 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in | |
6820 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. | |
6821 \let\captionline = \floatident | |
6822 % | |
6823 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else | |
6824 \ifx\floatident\empty \else | |
6825 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between | |
6826 \fi | |
6827 % | |
6828 % caption text. | |
6829 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% | |
6830 \fi | |
6831 % | |
6832 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. | |
6833 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. | |
6834 \ifx\captionline\empty \else | |
6835 \vskip.5\parskip | |
6836 \captionline | |
6837 % | |
6838 % Space below caption. | |
6839 \vskip\parskip | |
6840 \fi | |
6841 % | |
6842 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this | |
6843 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. | |
6844 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
6845 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as | |
6846 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short | |
6847 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. | |
6848 {% | |
6849 \atdummies | |
6850 % | |
6851 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M | |
6852 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so | |
6853 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. | |
6854 \scanexp{% | |
6855 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% | |
6856 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty | |
6857 \thiscaption | |
6858 \else | |
6859 \thisshortcaption | |
6860 \fi | |
6861 }% | |
6862 }% | |
6863 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident | |
6864 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% | |
6865 }% | |
6866 \fi | |
6867 \egroup % end of \vtop | |
6868 % | |
6869 % place the captured inserts | |
6870 % | |
6871 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning | |
6872 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly | |
6873 % float. --kasal, 26may04 | |
6874 % | |
6875 \checkinserts | |
6876 } | |
6877 | |
6878 % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. | |
6879 % | |
6880 \def\appendtomacro#1#2{% | |
6881 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% | |
6882 } | |
6883 | |
6884 % @caption, @shortcaption | |
6885 % | |
6886 \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} | |
6887 \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} | |
6888 \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} | |
6889 \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} | |
6890 | |
6891 % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are | |
6892 % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. | |
6893 \def\getfloatno#1{% | |
6894 \ifx#1\relax | |
6895 % Haven't seen this figure type before. | |
6896 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% | |
6897 % | |
6898 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. | |
6899 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos | |
6900 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% | |
6901 \fi | |
6902 \let\floatno#1% | |
6903 } | |
6904 | |
6905 % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref | |
6906 % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we | |
6907 % first read the @float command. | |
6908 % | |
6909 \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% | |
6910 | |
6911 % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can | |
6912 % distinguish floats from other xref types. | |
6913 \def\floatmagic{!!float!!} | |
6914 | |
6915 % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional | |
6916 % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic | |
6917 % \thissection value which we \setref above. | |
6918 % | |
6919 \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} | |
6920 % | |
6921 % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the | |
6922 % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. | |
6923 % | |
6924 \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% | |
6925 \def\temp{#1}% | |
6926 \def\iffloattype{#2}% | |
6927 \ifx\temp\floatmagic | |
6928 } | |
6929 | |
6930 % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. | |
6931 % | |
6932 \parseargdef\listoffloats{% | |
6933 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype | |
6934 {% | |
6935 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | |
6936 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | |
6937 \indexnofonts | |
6938 \turnoffactive | |
6939 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | |
6940 }% | |
6941 % | |
6942 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. | |
6943 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax | |
6944 \ifhavexrefs | |
6945 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. | |
6946 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% | |
6947 \fi | |
6948 \else | |
6949 \begingroup | |
6950 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc | |
6951 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo | |
6952 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname | |
6953 \endgroup | |
6954 \fi | |
6955 } | |
6956 | |
6957 % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the | |
6958 % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the | |
6959 % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which | |
6960 % has the text we're supposed to typeset here. | |
6961 % | |
6962 % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since | |
6963 % they won't appear in the aux file). | |
6964 % | |
6965 \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} | |
6966 \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% | |
6967 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just | |
6968 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the | |
6969 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link | |
6970 % in pdf output. | |
6971 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% | |
6972 % | |
6973 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. | |
6974 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% | |
6975 \writeentry | |
6976 }} | |
6977 | |
37713 | 6978 \message{localization,} |
6979 % and i18n. | |
6980 | |
6981 % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after | |
6982 % @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything | |
6983 % properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation. | |
6984 % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here. | |
6985 % | |
69769 | 6986 \parseargdef\documentlanguage{% |
37713 | 6987 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. |
69769 | 6988 % Read the file if it exists. |
6989 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex | |
6990 \ifeof 1 | |
6991 \errhelp = \nolanghelp | |
6992 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% | |
6993 \else | |
6994 \input txi-#1.tex | |
6995 \fi | |
6996 \closein 1 | |
37713 | 6997 \endgroup |
6998 } | |
6999 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or | |
7000 is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory | |
7001 should work if nowhere else does.} | |
7002 | |
7003 | |
7004 % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most | |
7005 % likely, but for now just recognize it. | |
7006 \let\documentencoding = \comment | |
7007 | |
7008 | |
7009 % Page size parameters. | |
7010 % | |
7011 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt | |
7012 | |
7013 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt | |
7014 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt | |
7015 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt | |
7016 | |
7017 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. | |
7018 \vbadness = 10000 | |
7019 | |
7020 % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. | |
7021 \hbadness = 2000 | |
7022 | |
7023 % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. | |
7024 \widowpenalty=10000 | |
7025 \clubpenalty=10000 | |
7026 | |
7027 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're | |
7028 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of | |
7029 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on | |
7030 % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. | |
7031 % | |
7032 \def\setemergencystretch{% | |
7033 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined | |
7034 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. | |
7035 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% | |
7036 \else | |
7037 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize | |
7038 \fi | |
7039 } | |
7040 | |
69769 | 7041 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; |
7042 % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; | |
7043 % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. | |
7044 % | |
7045 % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define | |
7046 % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. | |
7047 % | |
7048 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% | |
37713 | 7049 \voffset = #3\relax |
7050 \topskip = #6\relax | |
7051 \splittopskip = \topskip | |
7052 % | |
7053 \vsize = #1\relax | |
7054 \advance\vsize by \topskip | |
7055 \outervsize = \vsize | |
7056 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin | |
7057 \pageheight = \vsize | |
7058 % | |
7059 \hsize = #2\relax | |
7060 \outerhsize = \hsize | |
7061 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in | |
7062 \pagewidth = \hsize | |
7063 % | |
7064 \normaloffset = #4\relax | |
7065 \bindingoffset = #5\relax | |
7066 % | |
69769 | 7067 \ifpdf |
7068 \pdfpageheight #7\relax | |
7069 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax | |
7070 \fi | |
7071 % | |
47284 | 7072 \setleading{\textleading} |
7073 % | |
37713 | 7074 \parindent = \defaultparindent |
7075 \setemergencystretch | |
7076 } | |
7077 | |
7078 % @letterpaper (the default). | |
7079 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
7080 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
47284 | 7081 \textleading = 13.2pt |
37713 | 7082 % |
7083 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. | |
69769 | 7084 \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}% |
7085 {\voffset}{.25in}% | |
7086 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% | |
7087 {11in}{8.5in}% | |
37713 | 7088 }} |
7089 | |
69769 | 7090 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. |
37713 | 7091 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 |
7092 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt | |
47284 | 7093 \textleading = 12pt |
37713 | 7094 % |
69769 | 7095 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% |
7096 {\voffset}{.25in}% | |
7097 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% | |
7098 {9.25in}{7in}% | |
37713 | 7099 % |
7100 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in | |
7101 \tolerance = 700 | |
7102 \hfuzz = 1pt | |
7103 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | |
7104 \defbodyindent = .5cm | |
69769 | 7105 }} |
7106 | |
7107 % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. | |
7108 % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) | |
7109 \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
7110 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt | |
7111 \textleading = 12pt | |
7112 % | |
7113 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% | |
7114 {-.2in}{-.4in}% | |
7115 {0pt}{14pt}% | |
7116 {9in}{6in}% | |
7117 % | |
7118 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in | |
7119 \tolerance = 700 | |
7120 \hfuzz = 1pt | |
7121 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | |
7122 \defbodyindent = .4cm | |
37713 | 7123 }} |
7124 | |
7125 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. | |
7126 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
7127 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
69769 | 7128 \textleading = 13.2pt |
7129 % | |
7130 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 | |
7131 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. | |
7132 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust | |
7133 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then | |
7134 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in | |
7135 % your texinfo source file like this: | |
7136 % @tex | |
7137 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm | |
7138 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm | |
7139 % @end tex | |
7140 \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm} | |
7141 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | |
7142 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | |
7143 {297mm}{210mm}% | |
37713 | 7144 % |
7145 \tolerance = 700 | |
7146 \hfuzz = 1pt | |
69769 | 7147 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
7148 \defbodyindent = 5mm | |
37713 | 7149 }} |
7150 | |
7151 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. | |
7152 % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. | |
7153 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. | |
7154 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
7155 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt | |
47284 | 7156 \textleading = 12.5pt |
37713 | 7157 % |
69769 | 7158 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% |
7159 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | |
7160 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% | |
7161 {210mm}{148mm}% | |
37713 | 7162 % |
7163 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in | |
7164 \tolerance = 800 | |
7165 \hfuzz = 1.2pt | |
69769 | 7166 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
37713 | 7167 \defbodyindent = 2mm |
7168 \tableindent = 12mm | |
7169 }} | |
7170 | |
69769 | 7171 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. |
37713 | 7172 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 |
7173 \afourpaper | |
69769 | 7174 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% |
7175 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% | |
7176 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | |
7177 {297mm}{210mm}% | |
7178 % | |
7179 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. | |
37713 | 7180 \globaldefs = 0 |
7181 }} | |
7182 | |
69769 | 7183 % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. |
7184 \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
37713 | 7185 \afourpaper |
69769 | 7186 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% |
7187 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% | |
7188 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | |
7189 {297mm}{210mm}% | |
7190 \globaldefs = 0 | |
7191 }} | |
37713 | 7192 |
7193 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] | |
7194 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, | |
7195 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. | |
7196 % | |
69769 | 7197 \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} |
37713 | 7198 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% |
7199 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi | |
7200 \globaldefs = 1 | |
7201 % | |
7202 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
47284 | 7203 \setleading{\textleading}% |
37713 | 7204 % |
69769 | 7205 \dimen0 = #1 |
7206 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset | |
7207 % | |
7208 \dimen2 = \hsize | |
7209 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset | |
7210 % | |
7211 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% | |
7212 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% | |
7213 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | |
7214 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% | |
37713 | 7215 }} |
7216 | |
7217 % Set default to letter. | |
7218 % | |
7219 \letterpaper | |
7220 | |
7221 | |
7222 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} | |
7223 | |
7224 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. | |
7225 \catcode`\"=\other | |
7226 \catcode`\~=\other | |
7227 \catcode`\^=\other | |
7228 \catcode`\_=\other | |
7229 \catcode`\|=\other | |
7230 \catcode`\<=\other | |
7231 \catcode`\>=\other | |
7232 \catcode`\+=\other | |
7233 \catcode`\$=\other | |
7234 \def\normaldoublequote{"} | |
7235 \def\normaltilde{~} | |
7236 \def\normalcaret{^} | |
7237 \def\normalunderscore{_} | |
7238 \def\normalverticalbar{|} | |
7239 \def\normalless{<} | |
7240 \def\normalgreater{>} | |
7241 \def\normalplus{+} | |
47284 | 7242 \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix |
37713 | 7243 |
69769 | 7244 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt |
7245 % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, | |
37713 | 7246 % where something hairier probably needs to be done. |
7247 % | |
7248 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print | |
7249 % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero | |
7250 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all | |
7251 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. | |
7252 % | |
7253 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} | |
7254 | |
7255 % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches | |
7256 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from | |
7257 % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway | |
7258 % this is not a problem. | |
7259 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} | |
7260 | |
7261 % Turn off all special characters except @ | |
7262 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). | |
7263 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can | |
7264 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. | |
7265 | |
7266 \catcode`\"=\active | |
7267 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} | |
7268 \let"=\activedoublequote | |
7269 \catcode`\~=\active | |
7270 \def~{{\tt\char126}} | |
7271 \chardef\hat=`\^ | |
7272 \catcode`\^=\active | |
7273 \def^{{\tt \hat}} | |
7274 | |
7275 \catcode`\_=\active | |
7276 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} | |
69769 | 7277 \let\realunder=_ |
37713 | 7278 % Subroutine for the previous macro. |
69769 | 7279 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } |
37713 | 7280 |
7281 \catcode`\|=\active | |
7282 \def|{{\tt\char124}} | |
7283 \chardef \less=`\< | |
7284 \catcode`\<=\active | |
7285 \def<{{\tt \less}} | |
7286 \chardef \gtr=`\> | |
7287 \catcode`\>=\active | |
7288 \def>{{\tt \gtr}} | |
7289 \catcode`\+=\active | |
7290 \def+{{\tt \char 43}} | |
7291 \catcode`\$=\active | |
47284 | 7292 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix |
37713 | 7293 |
7294 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file | |
7295 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. | |
7296 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. | |
7297 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. | |
7298 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} | |
7299 | |
69769 | 7300 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after |
7301 % parsing them. | |
7302 \def\turnoffactive{% | |
7303 \normalturnoffactive | |
7304 \otherbackslash | |
7305 } | |
7306 | |
37713 | 7307 \catcode`\@=0 |
7308 | |
69769 | 7309 % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, |
7310 % as in \char`\\. | |
7311 \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ | |
7312 \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work | |
7313 | |
7314 % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and | |
7315 % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). | |
7316 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} | |
7317 | |
7318 % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash | |
7319 % in fixed width font. | |
37713 | 7320 \catcode`\\=\active |
69769 | 7321 @def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}} |
7322 % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: | |
7323 % @let \ = @normalbackslash | |
7324 | |
7325 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. | |
7326 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with | |
7327 % catcode other. | |
7328 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} | |
7329 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} | |
7330 | |
7331 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of | |
7332 % the literal character `\'. | |
7333 % | |
7334 @def@normalturnoffactive{% | |
7335 @let\=@normalbackslash | |
7336 @let"=@normaldoublequote | |
7337 @let~=@normaltilde | |
7338 @let^=@normalcaret | |
7339 @let_=@normalunderscore | |
7340 @let|=@normalverticalbar | |
7341 @let<=@normalless | |
7342 @let>=@normalgreater | |
7343 @let+=@normalplus | |
7344 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix | |
7345 @unsepspaces | |
7346 } | |
37713 | 7347 |
7348 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. | |
7349 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. | |
7350 @otherifyactive | |
7351 | |
7352 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. | |
7353 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing | |
7354 % a backslash. | |
7355 % | |
7356 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} | |
7357 @global@let\ = @eatinput | |
7358 | |
7359 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then | |
69769 | 7360 % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix |
37713 | 7361 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. |
69769 | 7362 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input |
37713 | 7363 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. |
7364 % | |
7365 @gdef@fixbackslash{% | |
7366 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi | |
7367 @catcode`+=@active | |
7368 @catcode`@_=@active | |
7369 } | |
7370 | |
7371 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. | |
7372 @escapechar = `@@ | |
7373 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
7374 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. |
37713 | 7375 @catcode`@& = @other |
7376 @catcode`@# = @other | |
7377 @catcode`@% = @other | |
7378 | |
7379 | |
7380 @c Local variables: | |
7381 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) | |
7382 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" | |
7383 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" | |
7384 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" | |
7385 @c time-stamp-end: "}" | |
7386 @c End: | |
52401 | 7387 |
69769 | 7388 @c vim:sw=2: |
7389 | |
52790
a93f1f4e2e49
Replace `%' in arch tagline by @ignore.
Luc Teirlinck <teirllm@auburn.edu>
parents:
52401
diff
changeset
|
7390 @ignore |
a93f1f4e2e49
Replace `%' in arch tagline by @ignore.
Luc Teirlinck <teirllm@auburn.edu>
parents:
52401
diff
changeset
|
7391 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 |
a93f1f4e2e49
Replace `%' in arch tagline by @ignore.
Luc Teirlinck <teirllm@auburn.edu>
parents:
52401
diff
changeset
|
7392 @end ignore |